medium-voltage switchgear - · pdf filemedium-voltage switchgear type nxplus c fixed-mounted...

237
Medium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated Medium-Voltage Switchgear INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Order No.: 802-9081.9 Revision: 02 Issue: 24.10.2008

Upload: vancong

Post on 01-Feb-2018

269 views

Category:

Documents


2 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Medium-Voltage SwitchgearType NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable

Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Medium-Voltage

Switchgear

INSTALLATION AND

OPERATING

INSTRUCTIONS

Order No.: 802-9081.9

Revision: 02

Issue: 24.10.2008

Page 2: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

2 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

About these Instructions

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or

variations in equipment, nor to provide for every

possible contingency to be met in connection

with installation or operation.

For details about technical design and equipment like

e.g. technical data, secondary equipment, circuit

diagrams, please refer to the order documents.

The switchgear is subject to continuous technical

development within the scope of technical

progress. If not stated otherwise on the individual

pages of these instructions, we reserve the right

to modify the specified values and drawings. All

dimensions are given in mm.

For further details, e.g. about additional equipment,

please refer to catalog HA 35.41.

Should further information be desired or should

particular problems arise which are not covered

sufficently by these instructions, the matter

should be referred to the competent Siemens

department.

The contents of this instruction manual shall not become

part or modify any prior or existing agreement,

commitment or relationship. The Sales Contract

contains the entire obligations of Siemens. The

warranty contained in the contract between the

parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any

statements contained herein do not create new

warranties or modify the existing warranty

Page 3: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 3

Contents

Safety instructions............................................................................5

1 Signal terms and definitions................................ 5

2 General instructions ............................................ 5

3 Due application.................................................... 7

4 Qualified personnel ............................................. 7

Description.........................................................................................8

5 Features .............................................................. 8

6 Panel types.........................................................10

7 Examples for panel versions ..............................11

8 Components.......................................................15

8.1 Circuit-breaker ....................................................15

8.2 Vacuum contactor ..............................................17

8.3 Three-position disconnector ...............................18

8.4 Three-position switch-disconnector ...................19

8.5 Operating mechanisms for three-position

disconnector/switch-disconnector..................... 24

8.6 4MT voltage transformers................................. 22

8.7 4MC current transformers................................. 24

8.8 HV HRC fuse assembly..................................... 25

8.9 Busbar system .................................................. 27

8.10 Cable connection............................................... 27

8.11 Ready-for-service indicator ................................ 39

8.12 Interlocks........................................................... 40

8.13 Voltage detecting systems ................................ 41

8.14 Accessories....................................................... 44

9 Technical data.................................................... 47

9.1 Complete switchgear ........................................ 47

9.2 Classification of NXPLUS C according to

IEC 62 271-200.................................................. 54

9.3 Standards, specifications, guidelines ................ 50

9.4 Selection of HV HRC fuse-links......................... 52

9.5 Transformer protection table (with HV HRC fuses

make SIBA)........................................................ 53

9.6 Motor protection table (with HV HRC fuses make

SIBA) ................................................................. 61

9.7 Fuse protection table for metering panel (with HV

HRC fuses make SIBA) ..................................... 62

9.8 Rating plates ..................................................... 63

9.9 Vacuum circuit-breaker ...................................... 64

9.10 Three-position disconnector for circuit-breaker,

disconnector and bus sectionalizer

panels ≥ 1000 A .................................................71

9.11 Three-position switch-disconnector for

switch-disconnector panels, ring-main panels and

circuit-breaker panels up to 630 A, contactor panel

and metering panel ............................................ 71

9.12 Endurance classes .............................................68

9.13 Vacuum contactor ..............................................69

10 End of service life ..............................................69

Installation ...................................................................................... 70

11 Constructional stipulations.................................70

11.1 Switchgear room................................................70

11.2 Constructional data, foundation ......................... 74

11.3 Transport units of NXPLUS C.............................87

12 Before installation ..............................................89

12.1 Preliminary clarifications ....................................89

12.2 Intermediate storage..........................................90

12.3 Tools/auxiliary means .........................................91

12.4 Installation and fixing material............................91

12.5 Comments on electromagnetic compatibility ....91

13 Switchgear, unloading and erecting ...................93

13.1 Packing and transport unit .................................93

13.2 Completeness and transport damages..............93

13.3 Unloading transport units...................................94

13.4 Transport to the place of installation (switchgear

room) .................................................................94

13.5 Checking the ready-for-service indicator ............97

14 Assembling the switchgear ...............................99

14.1 Bolting panels together......................................99

14.2 Fastening the switchgear to the foundation..... 101

14.3 Assembling the busbars .................................. 102

14.4 31.5 kA version: Mounting the busbar

support ............................................................ 116

14.5 Installing busbar current transformers ............. 113

14.6 Installing busbar voltage transformers ............. 114

14.7 Installing the earthing busbar............................117

14.8 Switchgear earthing ......................................... 118

14.9 Low-voltage compartments, installation .......... 119

14.10 Busbar covers .................................................. 119

14.11 Installing the end walls .................................... 122

14.12 Extension with individual panels...................... 123

15 Electrical connections ...................................... 124

15.1 Connecting cable T-plugs ................................. 124

Page 4: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

4 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

15.2 Panels 2000 A, 2500 A with double

connections ..................................................... 133

15.3 Connecting surge arresters ............................. 131

15.4 Surge limiters, connection............................... 131

15.5 Connecting auxiliary circuits ............................ 132

16 Installation of degree of protection versions

IP31D, IP32D and IP34D.................................. 138

16.1 IP31D - protection against vertically falling water

drops ............................................................... 138

16.2 IP32D - protection against vertically falling

water drops when the switchgear is inclined

by 15° .............................................................. 148

16.3 IP34D - protection against splashing water from

any direction .................................................... 146

17 Commissioning................................................ 147

17.1 Final work ........................................................ 147

17.2 Checking the accessories................................ 150

17.3 Instructing operating personnel ....................... 152

17.4 Function test / Test operation .......................... 152

17.5 Performing the power- frequency voltage

test .................................................................. 159

17.6 Primary injection test....................................... 156

17.7 Applying operational voltage (high voltage) ..... 156

Operation ....................................................................................... 158

18 Control elements ............................................. 158

19 Checking the ready-for-service indicator .......... 159

20 Circuit-breaker operation ................................. 160

20.1 Closing the circuit-breaker manually ................ 160

20.2 Opening the circuit-breaker manually .............. 160

20.3 Test operation without auxiliary voltage........... 161

20.4 Test operation with auxiliary voltage (motor

operating mechanism) ..................................... 162

20.5 Charging the closing spring manually .............. 162

21 Three-position switch operation ...................... 163

21.1 Closing the three-position switch.....................164

21.2 Opening the three-position switch ...................165

21.3 Earthing/ready-to-earth with the three-position

switch...............................................................166

21.4 De-earthing with the three-position switch ......167

21.5 Operating the three-position switch with motor-

operating mechanism.......................................167

21.6 Three-position switch-disconnector with spring-

operated/stored-energy mechanism ................168

21.7 Emergency operation of the three-position switch

with slow motion mechanism (900 mm panel

width) ...............................................................168

22 Verification of safe isolation from supply.......... 174

23 Replacing HV HRC fuse-links ...........................175

24 Operating the voltage transformer

disconnector.....................................................183

24.1 Opening the voltage transformer

disconnector.....................................................183

24.2 Closing the voltage transformer

disconnector.....................................................184

25 Short instructions .............................................181

25.1 Operating circuit-breaker panels.......................184

25.2 Operating vacuum contactor panels ................195

25.3 Operating switch-disconnector, disconnector, ring-

main and metering panels................................198

25.4 Operating bus sectionalizer panels ................. 202

25.5 Operating bus sectionalizers with two three-

position disconnectors .................................... 209

25.6 Operating circuit-breaker panel with busbar

earthing switch................................................ 224

26 Cable testing ................................................... 231

27 Maintenance ................................................... 233

27.1 Maintenance ................................................... 233

27.2 Switchgear extension and replacement of panels

and components ............................................. 233

Index ............................................................................................. 234

Page 5: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 5

Safety instructions

Safety instructions

1 Signal terms and definitions

Symbols used Operation symbol: Identifies an operation. Asks the operator to perform an

operation.

r Result symbol: Identifies the result of an operation.

2 General instructions

Independently of the safety instructions given in these operating instructions, the local

laws, ordinances, guidelines and standards for operation of electrical equipment as well

as for labor, health and environmental protection apply.

Five Safety Rules ofElectrical Engineering

The Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering must generally be observed during

operation of the products and components described in these operating instructions:

• Isolating.

• Securing against reclosing.

• Verifying safe isolation from supply.

• Earthing and short-circuiting.

• Covering or barriering adjacent live parts.

DANGER!

as used in these instructions, this means that personal injuries can occur if the relevant

precautionary measures are not taken.

Observe the safety instructions.

ATTENTION!

as used in these instructions, this means that damage to property or environment can

occur if the relevant precautionary measures are not taken.

Observe the safety instructions.

NOTE!

as used in these instructions, this points at facilitations of work, particularities for

operation or possible maloperation.

Observe the notes.

Page 6: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Safety instructions

6 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Prescribed work protectionclothing

To select the work protection clothing, the national standards and specifications of the

corresponding authorities and professional associations must absolutely be observed.

The following information provides basic instructions.

To work in electrical switchgear, protective equipment against arc faults must be used to

avoid serious burns.

The protective equipment consists of:

• Protective clothing

• Gloves

• Helmet and face protection

Fig. 1: Prescribed work protection clothing

Protective clothing Jacket and overalls made of double-layer material providing a protective effect against

electric arcs (e.g. Nomex® Comfort); if applicable, additional polo shirt made of the

same material.

Underwear only made of cotton or also Nomex®.

Gloves Gloves with gauntlets, the material of which must feature a dielectric strength of 1000 V

as a minimum.

Helmet Helmet in closed design (without ventilation holes), consisting of glass-fiber polyester

resin (not dripping under thermal effects), holding its shape up to 500° Celsius as a

minimum.

Face protection A face vizor made of clear acetate with a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm, protecting

against arc faults.

It should be possible to attach the face vizor to the helmet so that it can be folded.

Page 7: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 7

Safety instructions

3 Due application

The switchgear corresponds to the relevant laws, prescriptions and standards applicable

at the time of delivery. If correctly used, they provide a high degree of safety by means

of logical mechanical interlocks and shockproof metal enclosure of live parts.

4 Qualified personnel

Qualified personnel in accordance with these instructions are persons instructed by the

Switchgear Factory Frankfurt who are familiar with transport, installation,

commissioning, maintenance and operation of the product and have appropriate

qualifications for their work, e.g:

• Training and instruction or authorization to switch on, switch off, earth and identify

power circuits and equipment / systems as per the relevant safety standards.

• Training regarding the applicble specifications for the prevention of accidents and the

use of appropriate safety equipment.

• Training in first aid and behavior in the event of possible accidents.

DANGER!

The perfect and safe operation of this switchgear is conditional on:

Observance of operating and installation instructions.

Qualified personnel.

Proper transportation and correct storage of the switchgear.

Correct installation and commissioning.

Diligent operation and maintenance.

Observance of the instructions applicable at site for installation, operation and

safety.

Page 8: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

8 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Description

5 Features

Typical uses Extendable fixed-mounted circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C, single busbar, is used

in transformer and distribution substations as well as for switching duties in industrial

plants.

The panels are designed for rated voltages up to 24 kV and rated currents up to 2500 A.

In distribution systems up to 24 kV (15 kV), a maximum short-circuit current of 25 kA

(31.5 kA) is permissible.

Insulating gas SF6 Sulphur hexafluoride is used as insulating gas. SF6 insulates live parts between each

other and against the vessel wall. In panels with switch-disconnectors, SF6 is also used

for arc quenching.

The switchgear is delivered ex works with SF6 filling, ready for service. The SF6 filling is

provided to last the total service life of the switchgear.

No gas work is required for installation at site and later extensions.

Filling quantity as per rating plate.

Technology • Factory-assembled, type-tested and metal-enclosed switchgear for indoor installation

• Stainless-steel vessel welded gas-tight

• Switching device compartment gas-insulated

• Single-pole insulated: cable connection and busbar

• Installation and extension without SF6 gas work

• Screened busbar system, insulated with silicone rubber

• Cable connection from front with cable plugs

• Maintenance-free

Personal safety • Safe-to-touch due to metal enclosure of live parts

• Clear mimic diagram with mechanical position indicators

• HV HRC fuses and cable sealing ends are only accessible when outgoing feeders are

earthed (option)

• Operation is only possible when the enclosure is closed (only for panels with HV HRC

fuses)

• Logical mechanical interlocking

• Capacitive voltage detecting system to verify safe isolation from supply

• Earthing of outgoing feeders by means of make-proof earthing switch

• Resistance to internal arcing

- Pressure-resistant design of connection compartments

- Pressure relief duct at the rear (for free-standing arrangement)

Page 9: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 9

Description

Security of operation andavailability

• Hermetically sealed primary enclosure independent of environmental effects such as

pollution, humidity and small animals

• Welded switchgear vessel, sealed for life

• Operating mechanisms of switching devices accessible outside the switchgear vessel

• Maloperation is practically excluded due to interlocks and logical arrangement of

operating elements.

• Ready-for-service indicator self-monitoring, easy to read, independent of temperature

and environmental pressure variations, with contactless measured-value acquisition

and with signaling contacts (option) 1NO + 1NC for telecommunication.

• Minimum fire load

• Switchgear vessel designed as "sealed pressure system" according to IEC 62 271-200,

i.e. the insulating gas filling requires no maintenance.

Cost-efficiency Extremely low "life-cycle costs" and maximum availability thanks to:

• Maintenance-free design (for the service life)

• Climatic independence

• Minimum space requirements

• Long service life

Type approval NXPLUS C switchgear has been type-approved by the following classification societies:

• Lloyds Register of Shipping (LRS)

• Det Norske Veritas (DNV)

• German Lloyd (GL)

The switchgear is therefore also approved for application on ships and platforms.

Aseismic capacity (option) NXPLUS C switchgear can be upgraded for regions at risk from earthquakes. For

upgrading, earthquake qualification testing has been carried out in accordance with the

following standards:

• IEC 68-3-3, 1993

• IEC 68-2-6, 1995

• IABG TA13-TM-002/98 (guide)

Within the range of the prevailing earthquake frequencies from 1 Hz to 35 Hz, the

category 1 required response spectrum to IABG TA13-TM-002/98 covers the following

response spectra:

• Uniform Building Code zone 3

• Seismic Requirements Spec. 9067; Department of Water&Power, Los Angeles

• GTS – 1.013 ENDESA, Chile

• IEC 61 166

Page 10: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

10 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

6 Panel types

Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector panel Switch-disconnector panel Bus sectionalizer

Metering panel Contactor panel Ring-main panel

Vacuum circuit-breaker

Three-position switch-disconnector

Three-position disconnectorCapacitive voltage detecting system

Current transformer

Voltage transformer ---------------These components can be connected partly or optionally

Cable (not included in the scope of supply)

HV HRC fuse Vacuum contactor

Page 11: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 11

Description

7 Examples for panel versions

Fig. 2: Circuit-breaker panel (630 A)* Fig. 3: Circuit-breaker panel (1250 A)*

a Low-voltage compartment a Low-voltage compartment

s SIPROTEC bay controller (option) s SIPROTEC bay controller (option)

d Operating front d Operating front

f Capacitive voltage detecting system (busbar: left side, cable feeder: right side)

f Capacitive voltage detecting system (busbar: left side, cable feeder: right side)

g Cable compartment cover g Cable compartment cover

h Cable with cable plug for outside-cone plug-in system h Cable with cable plug for outside-cone plug-in system

j Voltage transformer (option) j Voltage transformer (option)

k Voltage transformer disconnector (option) k Voltage transformer disconnector (option)

l Ring-core current transformer (option) l Ring-core current transformer (option)

; Circuit-breaker with vacuum interrupters ; Circuit-breaker with vacuum interrupters

A Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

A Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

S Three-position switch-disconnector S Three-position disconnector

D Busbar system D Busbar system

F Pressure relief duct F Pressure relief duct (option wall-standing arrangement)

G Busbar voltage transformer (option) G Busbar voltage transformer (option)

* Shown without air guides in the cable compartment

Page 12: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

12 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 4: Circuit-breaker panel 900 mm panel ( 2000 A, 2500 A ) Fig. 5: Bus sectionalizer (1250 A)

a Low-voltage compartment a Low-voltage compartment

s SIPROTEC bay controller (option) s SIPROTEC bay controller (option)

d Operating front d Operating front

f Capacitive voltage detecting system f Capacitive voltage detecting system

g Cable compartment covers* g Cover

h Cable with cable plug for outside-cone plug-in system h Circuit-breaker with vacuum interrupters

j Voltage transformer (option) j Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

k Voltage transformer disconnector (option) k Three-position disconnector

l Ring-core current transformer (option) l Busbar system

; Circuit-breaker with vacuum interrupters ; Pressure relief duct (option for wall-standing arrangement)

A Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

S Three-position disconnector

D Twin busbar system (2500 A)

F Pressure relief duct

Page 13: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 13

Description

Fig. 6: Bus sectionalizer, 900 mm panel ( 2000 A, 2500 A )* Fig. 7: Contactor panel with fuses**

a Low-voltage compartment a Low-voltage compartment

s SIPROTEC bay controller (option) s SIPROTEC bay controller (option)

d Operating front d Operating front

f Capacitive voltage detecting system (busbar: left side, cable feeder: right side)

f Capacitive voltage detecting system (busbar: left side, cable feeder: right side)

g Cable compartment covers g Cable compartment cover

h Circuit-breaker with vacuum interrupters h Cable with cable plug for outside-cone plug-in system

j Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

j Ring-core current transformer (option)

k Three-position disconnector k HV HRC fuses in the fuse assembly

l Twin busbar system (2500 A) l Contactor with vacuum interrupters

; Pressure relief duct (option for wall-standing arrangement) ; Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

A Three-position switch-disconnector

S Busbar system

D Pressure relief duct (option for wall-standing arrangement)

F Busbar voltage transformer (option)

* only for 2500 A cable compartment cover with ventilation

** Shown without air guides in the cable compartment

Page 14: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

14 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 8: Switch-disconnector panel with fuses*

a Low-voltage compartment

s SIPROTEC bay controller (option)

d Operating front

f Capacitive voltage detecting system (busbar: left side, cable feeder: right side)

g Cable compartment cover

h Cable with cable plug for outside-cone plug-in system

j Ring-core current transformer (option)

k HV HRC fuses in the fuse assembly

l Switchgear vessel, hermetically welded, filled with SF6 gas, with bursting disc

; Three-position switch-disconnector

A Busbar system

S Pressure relief duct (option for wall-standing arrangement)

D Busbar voltage transformer (option)

* Shown without air guides in the cable compartment

Page 15: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 15

Description

8 Components

8.1 Circuit-breaker

Design The Siemens vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55 is a three-pole indoor circuit-breaker for

rated voltages from 7.2 kV to 24 kV.

The circuit-breaker consists of the following components:

• Operating mechanism with stored-energy spring mechanism and control elements

• Three circuit-breaker poles with vacuum interrupters

• Partition plate

• Operating rods for contact operation, mounted in the vessel front (partition plate) in a

movable way and without seals by means of welded-in metal bellows.

The operating mechanism box accommodates all electrical and mechanical components

required for closing and opening the circuit-breaker.

3AH55 circuit-breakers need no opening spring, as the contact pressure springs have an

opening effect in this pole version.

The operating mechanism box is closed with a removable cover. The cover contains

openings for the control elements and indicators.

The circuit-breaker is closed by pressing the ON pushbutton. The movement

transmission to the circuit-breaker poles is performed by metal bellows. The motor

recharges the closing spring immediately after.

If the motor supply voltage fails, the closing spring can be charged manually. To do this,

there is an opening in the cover with the hand crank coupling of the gear behind. The

charging condition of the spring can be read on the indicator.

The operations counter shows the number of charging processes.

Fig. 9: Circuit-breaker operating mechanism

a Auxiliary switch (S1)

s Operation for ON pushbutton

d Operation for OFF pushbutton

f Sockets for voltage indicators

g "Feeder earthed“ locking device

h 1st release (Y1)

j Position indicator for circuit-breaker

k Operations counter

l Closing solenoid (Y9)

; "Spring charged/spring not charged" indicator

A Position switch (S4)

S Closing spring

D Gear with motor (M1)

F Control board for three-position switch

Page 16: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

16 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Vacuum interrupters The vacuum interrupter is fixed at the interrupter support. The fixed contact is directly

connected to the housing. The moving contact is firmly connected to the connection bolt

and is centrally aligned in the guide. A metal bellows forms the vacuum-tight connection

to the interrupter housing.

Fig. 10: Vacuum interrupter

Equipment The basic version of the vacuum circuit-breaker is equipped as follows:

• Electrical operating mechanism (charging motor) with mechanical and electrical anti-

pumping device (M1)

• Closing solenoid (Y9)

• Shunt release (Y1)

• Low-voltage plug connector with 10-pole wiring (Q0)

• Auxiliary switch 4NO + 4NC or 3NO + 4NC freely available (S1)

• Position switch for "closing spring charged" indication (S41, S42)

• Circuit-breaker tripping signal, cutout switches (S6, S7)

• Operations counter

• Feeder locking device

Additional equipment • Extended auxiliary switch 10NO + 6NC or 9NO + 6NC freely available (S1)

• Shunt release (Y2)

• Undervoltage release (Y7)

• C.t-operated releases (Y4)

• Low-energy c.t-operated release (Y6)

• Interlocking between feeder locking device and three-position disconnector (circuit-

breaker only lockable in earthed position)

• Interlocking between feeder locking device, three-position disconnector and cable

compartment cover (circuit-breaker only lockable in earthed position, cable

compartment cover only removable in earthed position)

Page 17: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 17

Description

Possible releasecombinations

8.2 Vacuum contactor

Design The Siemens high-voltage vacuum contactor 3TL72, 3TL73 and 3TL74 is a three-pole

indoor contactor for rated voltages from 7.2 kV to 24 kV. The vacuum contactor can be

controlled from remote and has an electromagnetic operating mechanism suitable for

high switching rates and unlimited operating time. The electromagnetic operating

mechanism is suitable for AC or DC operation.

The vacuum contactor consists of the following components:

• Operating mechanism with magnetic drive and control elements

• Three contactor poles with vacuum interrupters

• Partition plate

• Operating rods for contact operation, mounted in the vessel front (mounting plate) in a

movable way and without seals by means of welded-in metal bellows.

The operating mechanism box accommodates all electrical and mechanical components

required for closing and opening the contactor.

The vacuum contactor has opening springs to ensure that the contactor switches off if

the supply voltage fails.

Equipment The basic version of the contactor is equipped as follows:

• Electromagnetic operating mechanism for unlimited operating time

• Auxiliary switch 3NO + 4NC freely available for customer

Optional • Extended auxiliary switch 5NO + 6NC freely available for customer

Release Release combination

1 2 3 4 5

1st shunt release Type 3AY1510 X X X – X

2nd shunt release Type 3AX1101 – X – – –

C.t.-operated release Type 3AX1102; 0.5 A or – – X X –

Type 3AX1104; 0.1 Ws

Undervoltage release Type 3AX1103 – – – – X

X: 1 no. of each release. A maximum of 2 releases can be combined only.

Page 18: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

18 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

8.3 Three-position disconnector

The three-position disconnector combines the functions DISCONNECTING and READY-

TO-EARTH.

Application:

• Circuit-breaker panel 1000 A to 2500 A

• Disconnector panel 1000 A to 2500 A

• Bus sectionalizer 1000 A to 2500 A

In circuit-breaker panels, earthing and short-circuiting the cable connection is completed

by closing the circuit-breaker.

Features • Operation via metal bellows or rotary bushings welded without seals into the front of

the switchgear vessel.

Equipment The basic version of the three-position disconnector is equipped as follows:

• Auxiliary switch, freely available for customer

- in EARTHING function with 3NO + 3NC

- in DISONNECTING function with 3NO + 3NC

• Mechanical interlocking to the circuit-breaker

Additional equipment • Motor operating mechanism

• Electromechanical interlock

Switch positions of the three-position disconnector

CLOSED position OPEN position READY-TO-EARTH position

a Busbar connection

s Cable connection or circuit-breaker

Page 19: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 19

Description

8.4 Three-position switch-disconnector

Designed as multi-chamber switch incorporating the functions DISCONNECTING and

EARTHING with the switch positions: CLOSED – OPEN – EARTHED

Application:

• Circuit-breaker panel 630 A

• Switch-disconnector panel

• Ring-main panel

• Contactor panel

• Metering panel

In ring-main, contactor, switch-disconnector and metering panels, earthing and short-

circuiting the cable connection is performed by switching the three-position switch-

disconnector to EARTHED position.

Features • Operation via metal bellows welded without seals into the front of the switchgear

vessel

Mode of operation The switch shaft with the moving contact pieces rotates inside the chamber containing

the fixed contact pieces. Compression vanes, which rotate in conjunction with the

switch shaft, divide each three-position switch into two subchambers, each of which

changes in conjunction with the rotation. During the switching movement, the

compression vanes generate a pressure difference between the subchambers. The SF6

gas flows through a nozzle, causes a directional blow-out of the breaking arc and

quenches it rapidly.

Additional equipment • Motor operating mechanism

• Electromechanical interlock

• Mechanical interlock (cable compartment cover only removable in earthed position)

Positions of the three-position switch-disconnector

CLOSED position OPEN position EARTHED position

a Busbar connection

s Cable connection or circuit-breaker

Page 20: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

20 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

8.5 Operating mechanisms for three-position disconnector/switch-disconnector

In NXPLUS C switchgear, the three-position switch-disconnector is used both as a

simple three-position disconnector in combination with the circuit-breaker and as a

three-position switch-disconnector.

The three-position disconnector/switch-disconnector is operated from the switchgear

front.

• Auxiliary switch

- Each operating mechanism is equipped with an auxiliary switch for the position

indication.

Spring-operated mechanism (rotary operating mechanism 90°)

• Application

- in circuit-breaker panels 630 A to 1250 A

- in disconnector panels 1000 A, 1250 A

- in bus sectionalizers 1000 A, 1250 A

- in vacuum contactor panels

- in metering panels

- in ring-main panels

a Position indicator for three-position switch (DISCONNECTING function)

s Position indicator for three-position switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

d Interrogation lever

f Actuating opening for earthing switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

g Actuating opening for disconnector (DISCONNECTING function)

h Control gate for opening the actuating openings (can only be operated if the interrogation lever d is pushed downwards)

j Ready-for-service indicator

Page 21: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 21

Description

Slow motion mechanism (rotary operating mechanism 180°)

• Application

- in circuit-breaker panels 2000 A, 2500 A

- in disconnector panels 2000 A, 2500 A

- in bus sectionalizers 2000 A, 2500 A

Spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism (rotary operating mechanism 90°)

• Application

- in switch-disconnector panels

• with additional energy store for the function "stored-energy OPEN" after tripping by HV

HRC fuse (striker tripping) or shunt release

Options • Motor operating mechanism

- Remote operation (standard) applied to terminal

- Local operation by momentary-contact rotary control switch (option)

- Manual operation possible with operating lever

• Shunt release (f-release)

- Spring-operated/stored-energy mechanisms can be equipped with a shunt release.

Remote electrical tripping of the three-position switch-disconnector is possible via

the magnetic coil of the shunt release, e.g. transformer overtemperature tripping.

• Wiring

- Auxiliary switches, motor operating mechanisms or shunt-releases are wired to

terminal strips in the low-voltage compartment.

a Position indicator for three-position switch (DISCONNECTING function)

s Interrogation lever

d Position indicator for three-position switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

f Ready-for-service indicator

g Actuating opening for earthing switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

h Actuating opening for disconnector (DISCONNECTING function)

j Control gate for opening the actuating openings (can only be operated if the interrogation lever s is pushed downwards)

a Position indicator for three-position switch (DISCONNECTING function)

s Position indicator for three-position switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

d Interrogation lever

f Actuating opening for earthing switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

g Actuating opening for disconnector (DISCONNECTING function)

h Control gate for opening the actuating openings (can only be operated if the interrogation lever d is pushed downwards)

j Ready-for-service indicator

Page 22: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

22 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

8.6 4MT voltage transformers

Features • According to IEC 60044-2 and VDE 0414 Part 2

• Cast-resin insulated

• Inductive type

• Touchable due to metal coating

• Safe-to-touch due to metal cover

• Pluggable

• Arranged outside the primary enclosure (switchgear vessel)

Mounting locations • At the busbar

• At the panel connection

Voltage transformer types • Busbar voltage transformer

- Pluggable in the cross pieces of the busbar using adapters

- No separate metering panel required

- Repeat test at 80% of the rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

possible with mounted voltage transformer

• Voltage transformer at the panel connection

- Switchable through an SF6-insulated disconnecting facility in the switchgear vessel

- Positions: "CLOSED" and "EARTHED"

- Operation of the disconnecting facility from outside through a metal bellows welded

in the switchgear vessel

- Voltage testing of switchgear and cables possible with mounted and earthed voltage

transformer

- Not suitable for 80% of the rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

(disconnect and earth voltage transformer through disconnecting facility)

Page 23: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 23

Description

Electrical data

Primary data for types 4MT3 und 4MT2

For operating voltages from 3.3 to 23 kV, rated voltage factor Un/8h = 1.9; Un/continuous = 1.2

Rated voltage [kV] Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage [kV]

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage [kV]

Standard Operating voltage [kV]

3.6 10 20 IEC 3.3/√3

7.2 20 60 IEC 3.6/√3; 4.8/√3; 5.0/√3; 6.0√3; 6.3/√3; 6.6/√3

32 60 GOST 6.0/√3; 6.3/√3; 6.6/√3

12 28 75 IEC 7.2/√3; 10/√3; 11/√3

42 75 GOST 10/√3; 11/√3

42 75 GB 10/√3; 11/√3

17.5 38 95 IEC 13.2/√3; 13.8/√3; 15/√3

24 50 125 IEC 17.5/√3; 20/√3; 23/√3

GOST: Russian standard, GB: Chinese standard

Secondary data

For type Operating voltage [V]

Auxiliary winding

Thermal limit current (measuring winding)

Rated long-time current 8 h

Rating at accuracy class [VA]

0.2 0.5 1 3

4MT3 100/√3;

110/√3;

120/√3

100/√3;

110/√3

120/√3

6 4 IEC

10, 15, 20, 25, 30 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150, 180

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150, 180

GOST 32/60 kV

10, 15, 20, 25, 30 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150, 180

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150, 180

GOST 42/75 kV, GB 42/75 kV

10, 15, 20, 25 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75, 90, 100, 120, 150

Panel connection [VA]

20 50, 75 100

4MT2 100/√3;

110/√3;

120/√3

100/√3;

110/√3;

120/√3

8 6 IEC

5, 10, 15, 20, 25 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60, 75

GOST 32/60 kV

5 10, 15 10, 15, 20, 25, 30

10, 15, 20, 25, 30

GOST 42/75 kV, GB 42/75 kV

5, 10 10, 15, 20, 25, 30

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60

10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 50, 60

Busbars [VA]

25 45 75

GOST: Russian standard, GB: Chinese standard

Page 24: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

24 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

8.7 4MC current transformers

Features • According to IEC 60044-1 and VDE 0414 Part 1

• Designed as ring-core current transformers:

- Ring core as carrier of secondary winding

- Main circuit corresponds to primary winding

• Arranged outside the primary enclosure (switchgear vessel) due to single-pole design

of cable connection and busbar

• Free of dielectrically stressed cast-resin parts (due to design)

Mounting locations • Around the busbar

• At the panel connection

• Around the cable

Current transformer types • Busbar current transformer

- Inside diameter of transformer 56 mm

- Usable height for 1250 A busbar

- Usable height for 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A busbar: 90 mm

• Feeder current transformer

- Inside diameter of transformer 106 mm

- Max. usable height 214 mm

• Cable-type current transformer

- Inside diameter of transformer 56 mm

- Max. usable height 170 mm

Page 25: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 25

Description

Electrical data

8.8 HV HRC fuse assembly

Designation for type 4MC

Operating voltage max. 0.8 kV

Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage (winding test)

3 kV

Rated frequency 50/60 Hz

Rated continuous thermal current max. 1.2 x rated current (primary)

Rated thermal short-time current, max. 3 s 25 kA, 31.5 kA

Rated current dynamic unlimited

primary 40 A to 2500 A

secondary 1 A and 5 A

Multiratio (secondary) 200 - 100 A to 2500 - 1250 A

Core data according to rated primary current max. 3 cores

Measuring core Rating 2.5 VA to 10 VA

Class 0.2 to 1

Overcurrent factor M10

Protection core Rating 2.5 VA to 30 VA

Class 5 or 10

Overcurrent factor P10 to P30

Permissible ambient air temperature max. 60 °C

Insulation class E

Fig. 11: HV HRC fuse assembly

a Fuse box

s HV HRC fuse

d Fuse slide (withdrawable)

f Bushing connection

g Mounting clip

h Cover with seal

j Articulation for tripping the spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism

k Tripping mechanism

Page 26: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

26 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Features • HV HRC fuse-links according to DIN 43 625 (main dimensions) with striker in "medium"

version according to IEC 60 282-1

- as short-circuit protection before transformers or motors,

- with selectivity to upstream and downstream connected equipment,

- single-phase insulated

• Requirements according to IEC 62 271-105 fulfilled by combination of HV HRC fuses

with the three-position switch-disconnector

• Thermal striker tripping when the corresponding HV HRC fuse-link is used

• Climate-independent and maintenance-free, with fuse boxes made of cast-resin

• Fuse assembly arranged under the switchgear vessel

• Fuse assembly connected to the three-position switch-disconnector / vacuum

contactor via welded bushings and connecting bars

• Fuses can only be replaced if feeder is earthed

• Option: "Fuse tripped indication" for remote electrical indication with 1NO contact

Mode of operation In the event that a HV HRC fuse-link has responded, the three-position switch-

disconnector is tripped via an articulation which is integrated into the cover of the fuse

box.

In the event that the fuse tripping fails, e.g. if the fault current is less than Imin or if the

fuse has been inserted incorrectly, the fuse box is protected by thermal protection. The

overpressure generated in this way trips the three-position switch-disconnector via a

diaphragm in the cover of the fuse box and via the articulation. The above thermal

protection works independently of the type and design of the HV HRC fuse used. Like

the fuse itself it is maintenance-free and independent of any outside climatic effects.

Schematic sketches forfuse tripping

Furthermore, the specified HV HRC fuses release the striker depending on the

temperature and trip the switch-disconnector as early as in the fuse overload range.

Impermissible heating of the fuse box can be avoided in this way.

Fuse-link in service condition

Fuse tripped by striker

Fuse tripped by overpressure, e.g. if fault current is less than Imin or if HV HRC fuse has been inserted incorrectly

Page 27: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 27

Description

8.9 Busbar system

The busbar is single-pole insulated with silicone rubber. Each phase has an earthed layer

on the outside (screened busbar system). This design makes the busbar independent of

climatic effects.

As the busbar system is arranged outside the gas compartment, extension, replacement

or increasing the current carrying capacity by doubling the system is possible within a

very short period of time without requiring any gas work.

To by-pass a removed panel, busbars with double length are available. With these, a

defective panel can be by-passed within a few hours, and switchgear operation can

continue.

8.10 Cable connection

Possible combinations of cable connection types (T-plugs, coupling inserts) and surge arrestersin NXPLUS C up to 24 kV

For gas-insulated switchgear NXPLUS C, basically only cable T-plugs shielded by means

of an external semi-conductive layer (also called screened cable T-plugs) can be used.

This external semi-conductive layer must be earthed. Earthing is normally done through

a cable connection.

Insulated cable T-plugs (without external semi-conductive layer) are not permissible, as

this plug type often produces partial discharges due to the proximity to earthed parts of

the switchgear. Partial discharges destroy the cable T-plug, causing an arc between

phase and earth.

The connection of conventional cable sealing ends via elbow adapters, e.g. type AKE, is

not permissible either, as this connection system is also insulated and not screened (no

external semi-conductive layer).

Fig. 12: 1250 A busbar system Fig. 13: 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A busbar system

Page 28: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

28 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Circuit-breaker panel 630 A/1000 A, switch-disconnector panel 630 A, disconnector panel 1000 A, ring-main panel 630 A, contactor panel, circuit-

breaker panel with top-rear cable connection 1250 A2)

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts additionally12 kV 12 kV

24 kV 24 kV

1 Euromold 35 to 300 EPDM 1x 400TB/G -400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx

-

1x K400TB/G -

35 to 300 EPDM 1x 430 TB-630A -300SA-5(10)SA

-

1x K430TB-630A -

400 to 630 EPDM 1x 440TB/G -400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx

-

1x K440TB/G -

Südkabel 50 to 300 Silicone 1x SET 12 -MUT 23

-

25 to 240 1x SET 24 -

400 to 500 Silicone 1x SEHDT 13 -MUT 23

-

300 to 500 1x SEHDT 23 -

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 1x CB 12-630 - CSA 12-x -

25 to 500 1x CB 17,5-630 - CSA 17,5-x -

25 to 300 1x CB 24-630 - CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x CB 36-630(1250) - CSA 12-x -

1x CB 36-630(1250) - CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-L56xx - RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

1x RSTI-L56xx - RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-58xx -RSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

1x RSTI-58xx - -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x RSTI-36Lxx - RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

1x RSTI-56Lxx - RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

3 M 50 to 240 Silicone 1x 93-EE 705-6 - - -

50 to 240 1x 93-EE 705-6 -

300 to 400 Silicone 1x 93-EE 715-6 - - -

1x 93-EE 715-6 -1) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.

2) At a normal current of more than 1150 A, cable sealing ends with tin-plated, nickel-plated or silver-plated cable lugs are required.

3) In 1250 A cable connection panels with top-rear cable connection, surge arresters cannot be used.

Page 29: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 29

Description

Circuit-breaker panel 630 A/1000 A, switch-disconnector panel 630 A, disconnector panel 1000 A, ring-main panel 630 A, contactor panel, circuit-

breaker panel 1250 A with top-rear cable connection2)

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts additionally12 kV 12 kV

24kV 24kV

2 3) Euromold 35 to 300 EPDM 2x 400TB/G 1x 400CP - -

2x K400TB/G 1x K400CP - -

35 to 300 EPDM 1x 430TB-630A 1x 300PB-630A

1xK430TB-630A 1x K300PB-630A - -

400 to 630 EPDM 2x 440TB/G 1x 440CP - -

2x K440TB/G 1x K440CP - -

Südkabel 50 to 300 Silicone 1x SET 12 1x SEHDK 13.1 - -

25 to 240 1x SET 24 1x SEHDK 23.1

50 to 300 Silicone 2x SET 12 1x KU 23.2 - -

25 to 240 2x SET 24 1x KU 23.2

400 to 500 Silicone 2x SEHDT 13 1x KU 23 - -

300 to 500 2x SEHDT 23 1x KU 23

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 1x CB 12-630 1x CC 12-630 CSA 12-x -

25 to 500 1x CB 17,5-630 1x CC 17,5-630 CSA 17,5-x

25 to 300 1x CB 24-630 1x CC 24-630 CSA 24-x -

25 to 300 Silicone 2x CB 12-630 1x CP 630-C CSA 12-x -

2x CB 24-630 1x CP 630-C CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x CB 36-630(1250) 1x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 12-x -

1x CB 36-630(1250) 1x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 2x CB 36-630(1250) 1x CP 630-M16 CSA 12-x -

2x CB 36-630(1250) 1x CP 630-M16 CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-L56xx 1x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

1x RSTI-L56xx 1x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-58xx 1x RSTI-CC-58xxRSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

1x RSTI-58xx 1x RSTI-CC 58xx -

400 to 630 Silicone 2x RSTI-36Lxx 1x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

2x RSTI-56Lxx 1x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

3M 50 to 240 Silicone 2x 93-EE 705-6 1x KU 23.2 - -

25 to 240 2x 93-EE 705-6 1x KU 23.2

150 to 240 Silicone 1x 93-EE 705-6 1x 93-EE 718-6 - -

1x 93-EE 705-6 1x 93-EE 718-6

300 to 400 Silicone 2x 93-EE 715-6 1x KU 23.2 - -

2x 93-EE 715-6 1x KU 23.2

1) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.2) At a normal current of more than 1150 A, cable sealing ends with tin-plated, nickel-plated or silver-plated cable lugs are required.

3) In 1250 A cable connection panels with top-rear cable connection, surge arresters cannot be used.

Page 30: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

30 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Circuit-breaker panel 1250 A 2), Disconnector panel 1250 A 2)

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts

additionally12 kV 12 kV

24 kV 24 kV

1 Euromold 35 to 300 EPDM 1x 400TB/G -400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx

-

1x K400TB/G -

35 to 300 EPDM 1x 430 TB-630A -300SA-5(10)SA

-

1x K430TB-630A -

400 to 630 EPDM 1x 440TB/G -400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx

-

1x K440TB/G -

Südkabel 50 to 300 Silicone 1x SET 12 -MUT 23

-

25 to 240 1x SET 24 -

400 to 500 Silicone 1x SEHDT 13 -MUT 23

-

300 to 500 1x SEHDT 23 -

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 1x CB 12-630 - CSA 12-x -

1x CB 24-630 - CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x CB 36-630(1250) - CSA 12-x -

1x CB 36-630(1250) - CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics 25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-L56xx - RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

1x RSTI-L56xx - RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-58xx -RSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

1x RSTI-58xx - -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x RSTI-36Lxx - RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

1x RSTI-56Lxx - RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

1) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.2) At a normal current of more than 1150 A, cable sealing ends with tin-plated, nickel-plated or silver-plated cable lugs are required.

Page 31: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 31

Description

Circuit-breaker panel 1250 A 2), Disconnector panel 1250 A 2)

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts

additionally12 kV 12 kV

24 kV 24 kV

2 Euromold 35 to 300 EPDM 2x 400TB/G 1x 400CP400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx -

2x K440TB/G 1x K400CP

35 to 300 EPDM 1x 430TB-630A 1x 300PB-630A300SA-5(10)SA -

1x K430TB-630A 1x K300PB-630A

400 to 630 EPDM 2x 440TB/G 1x 440CP400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx -

2x K440TB/G 1x K440CP

Südkabel 50 to 300 Silicone 1x SET 12 1x SEHDK 13.1 - -

25 to 240 1x SET 24 1x SEHDK 23.1 - -

50 to 300 Silicone 2x SET 12 1x KU 23.2 - -

25 to 240 2x SET 24 1x KU 23.2 - -

400 to 500 Silicone 2x SEHDT 13 1x KU 23 - -

300 to 500 2x SEHDT 23 1x KU 23 - -

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 1x CB 12-630 1x CC 12-630 CSA 12-x -

1x CB 24-630 1x CC 24-630 CSA 24-x

25 to 300 Silicone 2x CB 12-630 1x CP 630-C CSA 12-x -

2x CB 24-630 1x CP 630-C CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x CB 36-630(1250) 1x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 12-x -

1x CB 36-630(1250) 1x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics 25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-L56xx 1x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

1x RSTI-L56xx 1x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-58xx 1x RSTI-CC-58xxRSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

1x RSTI-58xx 1x RSTI-CC 58xx -

400 to 630 Silicone 2x RSTI-36Lxx 1x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

2x RSTI-56Lxx 1x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M161) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.

2) At a normal current of more than 1150 A, cable sealing ends with tin-plated, nickel-plated or silver-plated cable lugs are required.

Page 32: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

32 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Circuit-breaker panel 1250 A 2), Disconnector panel 1250 A 2)

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts

additionally12 kV 12 kV

24 kV 24 kV

3 Euromold 35 to 300 4) EPDM 3x 400TB/G 2x 400CP - -

3x K400TB/G 2x K400CP - -

35 to 300 EPDM 1x 430TB-630A 2x 300PB-630A - -

1x K430TB-630A 2x K300PB-630A - -

400 to 630 4) EPDM 3x 440TB/G 2x 440CP - -

3x K440TB/G 2x K440CP - -

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 1x CB 12-630 2x CC 12-630 CSA 12-x -

1x CB 24-630 2x CC 24-630 CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 1x CB 36-630(1250) 2x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 12-x -

1x CB 36-630(1250) 2x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics 25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-L56xx 2x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

1x RSTI-L56xx 2x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 1x RSTI-58xx 2x RSTI-CC-58xxRSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

1x RSTI-58xx 2x RSTI-CC-58xx -

400 to 630 Silicone 3x RSTI-36Lxx 2x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

3x RSTI-56Lxx 2x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M161) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.

2) At a normal current of more than 1150 A, cable sealing ends with tin-plated, nickel-plated or silver-plated cable lugs are required.

4) Only possible with deep cable compartment cover.

Page 33: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 33

Description

Circuit-breaker and disconnector panel 2000 A, 2500 A

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts

additionally12 kV 12kV

24 kV 24 kV

2 Euromold 35 to 300 EPDM 2x 400TB/G -400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx

-

2x K400TB/G -

35 to 300 EPDM 2x 430 TB-630A -300SA-5(10)SA

-

2x K430TB-630A -

400 to 630 EPDM 2x 440TB/G -400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx

-

2x K440TB/G -

Südkabel 50 to 300 Silicone 2x SET 12 -MUT 23

-

25 to 240 2x SET 24 -

400 to 500 Silicone 2x SEHDT 13 -MUT 23

-

300 to 500 2x SEHDT 23 -

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 2x CB 12-630 - CSA 12-x -

25 to 500 2x CB 17.5-630 - CSA 17,5-x -

25 to 300 2x CB 24-630 - CSA 24-x

400 to 630 Silicone 2x CB 36-630(1250) - CSA 12-x -

2x CB 36-630(1250) - CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

25 to 300 Silicone 2x RSTI-L56xx - RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

2x RSTI-L56xx - RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 2x RSTI-58xx -RSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

2x RSTI-58xx - -

400 to 630 Silicone 2x RSTI-36Lxx - RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

2x RSTI-56Lxx - RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

3M 50 to 240 Silicone 2x 93-EE 705-6 - - -

25 to 240 2x 93-EE 705-6 -

300 to 400 Silicone 2x 93-EE 715-6 - - -

2x 93-EE 715-6 -

1) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.

3) Only possible with deep cable compartment cover.

Page 34: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

34 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Circuit-breaker and disconnector panel 2000 A, 2500 A

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts

additionally12 kV 12 kV

24 kV 24 kV

4 Euromold 35 to 300 EPDM 4x 400TB/G 2x 400CP400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx -

4x K440TB/G 2x K400CP

35 to 300 EPDM 2x 430TB-630A 2x 300PB-630A300SA-5(10)SA -

2x K430TB-630A 2x K300PB-630A

400 to 630 EPDM 4x 440TB/G 2x 440CP400PB-5(10)-SA-xxx -

4x K440TB/G 2x K440CP

Südkabel 50 to 300 Silicone 2x SET 12 2x SEHDK 13.1 MUT 23 -

25 to 240 2x SET 24 2x SEHDK 23.1

50 to 300 Silicone 4x SET 12 2x KU 23.2 MUT 23 -

25 to 240 4x SET 24 2x KU 23.2

400 to 500 Silicone 4x SEHDT 13 2x KU 23 MUT 23 -

300 to 500 4x SEHDT 23 2x KU 23

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 2x CB 12-630 2x CC 12-630 CSA 12-x -

25 to 500 2x CB 17.5-630 2x CC 12-630 CSA 17,5-x -

25 to 300 2x CB 24-630 2x CC 24-630 CSA 24-x

25 to 300 Silicone 4x CB 12-630 2x CP 630-C CSA 12-x -

4x CB 24-630 2x CP 630-C CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 2x CB 36-630(1250) 2x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 12-x -

2x CB 36-630(1250) 2x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 24-x -

400 to 630 Silicone 4x CB 36-630(1250) 2x CP 630-M16 CSA 12-x -

4x CB 36-630(1250) 2x CP 630-M16 CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

25 to 300 Silicone 2x RSTI-L56xx 2x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

2x RSTI-L56xx 2x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 2x RSTI-58xx 2x RSTI-CC-58xxRSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

2x RSTI-58xx 2x RSTI-CC 58xx -

400 to 630 Silicone 4x RSTI-36Lxx 2x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

4x RSTI-56Lxx 2x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

3M 50 to 240 Silicone 4x 93-EE 705-6 2x KU 23.2 - -

25 to 240 4x 93-EE 705-6 2x KU 23.2

150 to 240 Silicone 2x 93-EE 705-6 2x 93-EE 718-6

2x 93-EE 705-6 2x 93-EE 718-6

300 to 400 Silicone 4x 93-EE 715-6 2x KU 23.2 - -

4x 93-EE 715-6 2x KU 23.2

1) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.

3) Only possible with deep cable compartment cover.

Page 35: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 35

Description

Circuit-breaker and disconnector panel 2000 A, 2500 A

Number of cables per panel and phase

Make Conductor cross-

section 1)

Insulation Cable T-plug Coupling inserts/coupling plugs

Surge arresters with coupling inserts

[mm2] bolted bolted Arresters Coupling inserts

additionally12 kV 12 kV

24 kV 24 kV

6 Euromold 35 to 3003) EPDM 6x 400TB/G 4x 400CP - -

6x K400TB/G 4x K400CP - -

35 to 300 EPDM 2x 430TB-630A 4x 300PB-630A - -

2x K430TB-630A 4x K300PB-630A - -

400 to 630 3) EPDM 6x 440TB/G 4x 440CP - -

6x K440TB/G 4x K440CP - -

nkt cables 25 to 300 Silicone 2x CB 12-630 4x CC 12-630 CSA 12-x -

25 to 500 2x CB 17.5-630 4x CC 12-630 CSA 17,5-x -

25 to 300 2x CB 24-630 4x CC 24-630 CSA 24-x

400 to 630 Silicone 2x CB 36-630(1250) 4x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 12-x -

2x CB 36-630(1250) 4x CC 36-630(1250) CSA 24-x -

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

25 to 300 Silicone 2x RSTI-L56xx 4x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-L56SAxxxx -

2x RSTI-L56xx 4x RSTI-CC-L56xx RSTI-CC-66SAxxxx -

25 to 300 Silicone 2x RSTI-58xx 4x RSTI-CC-58xxRSTI-CC-58SAxxxx

-

2x RSTI-58xx* 4x RSTI-CC-58xx -

400 to 630 Silicone 6x RSTI-36Lxx 4x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-L56SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

6x RSTI-56Lxx 4x RSTI-66CP-M16 RSTI-66SAxxxx RSTI-66CP-M16

1) Observe the actual short-circuit and current carrying capacity of the cables and sealing ends.3) Only possible with deep cable compartment cover.

Page 36: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

36 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Thermoplastic-insulatedcables ≤ 12 kV

according to IEC 60 502-2 and VDE 0276-620

Cable type Cable sealing end Comment

Make Type Cross-section [mm2]

1-core cable, PE and XLPE-insulated

N2YSY (Cu) and N2XSY (Cu)

or

NA2YSY (Al) and NA2XSY (Al)

Euromold 400 TB/G 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer

430TB-630A 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer

440 TB/G 400 to 630 EPDM with semi-conductive layer

nkt cables CB 12-630 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

CB 17.5-630 25 to 500 Silicone with semi-conductive layer

CB 36-630(1250) 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer

Südkabel SET 12 50 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

SEHDT 13 400 to 500 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

RSTI-L56xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point

RSTI-58xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point

RSTI-36Lxx 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point

3M 93-EE 705-6 50 to 240 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

93-EE 715-6 300 to 400 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

3-core cable, PE and XLPE-insulated

N2YSY (Cu) and N2XSY (Cu)

or

NA2YSY (Al) and NA2XSY (Al)

Euromold 400 TB/G 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

430TB-630A 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

440 TB/G 400 to 630 EPDM with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

nkt cables CB 12-630 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

CB 17.5-630 25 to 500 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

CB 36-630(1250) 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

Südkabel SET 12 50 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

SEHDT 13 400 to 500 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

Tyco Electronics Raychem

RSTI-L56xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

RSTI-58xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

RSTI-36Lxx 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

3M 93-EE 705-6 50 to 240 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

93-EE 715-6 300 to 400 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

Page 37: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 37

Description

Thermoplastic-insulatedcables 15/17.5/24 kV

according to IEC 60 502-2 and VDE 0276-620

Cable type Cable sealing end Comment

Make Type Cross-section [mm2]

1-core cable, PE and XLPE-insulated

N2YSY (Cu) and N2XSY (Cu)

or

NA2YSY (Al) and NA2XSY (Al)

Euromold K400TB/G 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer

K430TB-630A 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer

K440 TB/G 400 to 630 EPDM with semi-conductive layer

nkt cables CB 24-630 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

CB 36-630(1250) 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer

Südkabel SET 24 50 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

SEHDT 23 400 to 500 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

RSTI-L56xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point

RSTI-58xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point

RSTI-56Lxx 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point

3M 93-EE 705-6 25 to 240 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

93-EE 715-6 300 to 400 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing)

3-core cable, PE and XLPE-insulated

N2YSY (Cu) and N2XSY (Cu)

or

NA2YSY (Al) and NA2XSY (Al)

Euromold K400TB/G 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

K430TB-630A 35 to 300 EPDM with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

K440 TB/G 400 to 630 EPDM with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

nkt cables CB 24-630 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

CB 36-630(1250) 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, in combination with distribution set

Südkabel SET 24 50 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

SEHDT 23 400 to 500 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

RSTI-L56xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

RSTI-58xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

RSTI-56Lxx 400 to 630 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with distribution set

3M 93-EE 705-6 25 to 240 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

93-EE 715-6 300 to 400 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with distribution set

Page 38: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

38 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Paper-insulated beltedcables ≤ 12 kV

according to IEC 60 055 and VDE 0255

Paper-insulated beltedcables ≤ 12 kV

acccording to GOST 18410-73

Cable T-plug connection • Connection of cable T-plugs suitable for bushings with outside cone as interface type C

according to EN 50181

• Connection cross-sections up to 630 mm2

Surge arresters • Pluggable on cable T-plug (Euromold, nkt cables)

• Surge arresters recommended if, at the same time,

- the cable system is directly connected to the overhead line,

- the protection zone of the surge arrester at the end tower of the overhead line does

not cover the switchgear

Cable type Cable sealing end Comment

Make Type Cross-section [mm2]

3-core cable, paper-insulated

NKBA (Cu), NKBY (Cu), NKRA (Cu) and NKFA (Cu)

or

NAKBA (Al), NAKBY (Al), NAKRA (Al) and NAKFA (Al)

nkt cables CB 24-630 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with transition sealing end type SÜEV 10

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

RSTI-58xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with transition sealing end type SMOE

Cable type Cable sealing end Comment

Make Type Cross-section [mm2]

3-core cable, paper-insulated

ASB and ASBL

nkt cables CB 24-630 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer (optionally with metal housing), in combination with transition sealing end type SÜEV 10

Tyco Electronics

Raychem

RSTI-58xx 25 to 300 Silicone with semi-conductive layer, with capacitive measuring point, in combination with transition sealing end type SMOE

NOTE!

For connection of 3, 4 or 6 cables:

Always observe the manufacturer's specifications to the rated normal current of the

cable plugs used.

Page 39: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 39

Description

Surge limiters • Pluggable on cable T-plug (Euromold, nkt cables, Tyco Electronics Raychem)

• Euromold

- Use of the cable T-plug 300PB-630A-U-BEGRENZ for connection of the surge limiter

• nkt cables

- Use of the cable T-plug CC 12-630, CC 17,5-630 or CC 24-630 in combination with the

assembly kit 26 500 33 for connection of the surge limiter

• Tyco Electronics Raychem

- Use of the cable T-plug SMOE 63862 for connection of the surge limiter

• Surge limiters recommended when motors with small starting currents (<600 A) are

connected

8.11 Ready-for-service indicator

Fig. 14: Ready-for-service indicator on the front plate

Features • Self-monitoring, easy to read

• Independent of temperature and pressure variations

• Independent of the site altitude

• Only responds to changes in gas density

• Option: Alarm switch 1NO + 1NC for remote electrical indication

• Contactless detection of gas monitoring

Mode of operation

For the ready-for-service indicator, a gas-tight measurement box is installed inside the

switchgear vessel. A coupling magnet transmits the position of the measurement box to

an armature located outside the switchgear vessel. This armature moves the ready-for-

service indicator of the switchgear.

Thermal variations of the gas pressure are compensated, as the gas available in the

measurement box and in the vessel expands in the same way when it gets warm. A

change of the gas density in the switchgear vessel caused by a leak is indicated due to

the pressure difference between the switchgear vessel and the measurement box. The

gas density is decisive for the insulating capacity.

Fig. 15: Gas monitoring principle

1 Stainless-steel vessel filled with SF6 gas

2 Measurement box in stainless-steel vessel filled with SF6 gas

3 Magnetic coupling

4 Red indication: not ready for service

5 Green indication: ready for service

Page 40: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

40 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

8.12 Interlocks

• The three-position switch is equipped with a mechanical interlock. This interlock

prevents the circuit-breaker from being closed while the three-position switch is being

operated. Furthermore the mechanical interlock prevents the three-position switch

from being operated while the circuit-breaker is closed.

• The switching gate prevents switching straight from CLOSED to READY-TO-EARTH or

from READY-TO-EARTH to CLOSED, as the operating lever must be re-inserted in the

OPEN position.

• The control gate of the switching gate of the three-position switch can be padlocked in

all three switch positions. Control gate lever on the left: the three-position (switch-

)disconnector can be operated, in the center: switching operations are not possible,

on the right: ready-to-earth/earthing is possible.

• Interlocking between feeder locking device and three-position disconnector (circuit-

breaker only lockable in earthed position)

• Interlocking between feeder locking device, three-position disconnector and cable

compartment cover (circuit-breaker only lockable in earthed position, cable

compartment cover only removable in earthed position)

• To access the fuse-links, the cable compartment cover must be removed. It can only

be removed when the associated feeder is earthed and the bolted joints are removed.

• To do this, lift the interlocking lever a and remove the cable compartment cover s.

Page 41: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 41

Description

8.13 Voltage detecting systems

For voltage detection according to IEC 61243-5 and VDE 0682 Part 415 with

• LRM system

ATTENTION!

The cable compartment covers of the 600 mm panels are coded by drill holes to avoid

mistakes.

Two drill holes in cable compartment covers for 600 mm panels without fuses (view

from the top):

Three drill holes in cable compartment covers for 600 mm panels with fuses (view

from the top):

Page 42: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

42 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

• VOIS+, VOIS R+ (option)

• CAPDIS -S1+/-S2+(option)

Features of LRM system • Verification of safe isolation from supply phase by phase through insertion in each

socket pair

• Voltage indicator suitable for continuous operation

• Safe-to-touch

• Routine-tested

• Measuring system and voltage indicator can be tested

• Voltage indicator flashes if high voltage is present

• Fixed-mounted capacitive voltage dividers in the bushings

Features of VOIS+, VOIS R+ • Integrated display, without auxiliary power

• With indication "A1" to "A3", (see legend in the illustration below)

• Maintenance-free, repeat test required

• With integrated three-phase test socket for phase comparison (also suitable for plug-in

voltage indicator)

• Degree of protection IP 67, temperature range -25 °C to +55°C

• With integrated signaling relays (only VOIS R+)

• "M1": Operating voltage present at one phase L1, L2 or L3 as a minimum

• "M2": Operating voltage not present at L1, L2 and L3

Common features ofCAPDIS-Sx+

• Maintenance-free

• Integrated display, without auxiliary power

• Integrated repeat test of the interfaces (self-monitoring)

• With integrated function test (without auxiliary power) by pressing the "Device-

Function-Test" pushbutton

• With integrated three-phase test socket for phase comparison (also suitable for plug-in

voltage indicator)

• Degree of protection IP 54, temperature range –25 °C to +55 °C

• With capacitance circuit

Page 43: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 43

Description

Features of CAPDIS-S1+ • Without auxiliary power

• With indication "A1" to "A5" (see legend in the illustration below)

• Without ready-for-service monitoring

• Without signaling relay (thus without auxiliary contacts)

Features of CAPDIS-S2+ • With indication "A0" to "A6", (see legend in the illustration below)

• Only by pressing the "Device-Function-Test" pushbutton: "ERROR" indication (A6), e.g.

in case of missing auxiliary voltage

• With ready-for-service monitoring (external auxiliary power required)

• With integrated signaling relay for signals "M1" to ”M4” (auxiliary power required):

- "M1": Voltage present at phases L1, L2, L3

- "M2": Voltage not present at L1, L2 and L3 (= active zero indication)

- "M3": Earth fault or voltage failure, e.g. in one phase

- "M4": External auxiliary power missing (with operating voltage present or not)

Indications VOIS, VOIS R+,CAPDIS -S1+/-S2+

Indica-tion

VOIS+, VOIS R+ CAPDIS-S1+ CAPDIS-S2+

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

A0 Operating voltage not present (CAPDIS-S2+)

A1 Operating voltage present

A2 - Operating voltage not present

- Auxiliary power not present (CAPDIS-S2+)

A3 Failure in phase L1, operating voltage at L2 and L3 (for CAPDIS-Sx+ also earth-fault indication)

A4 Voltage (not operating voltage) present

A5 Indication: "Device-Funtion-Test" passed

A6 Indication: "ERROR" e.g. in case of missing auxiliary voltage (CAPDIS-S2+, error indication M4)

Page 44: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

44 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

8.14 Accessories

Accessories, standard The standard accessories are supplied in a service flap in the switchgear end wall.

Fig. 16: Service flap for standard accessories

• Operating instructions

• One operating lever for the three-position disconnector for the DISCONNECTING

function with black ball handles, and one operating lever for the EARTHING/READY-TO-

EARTH function with red ball handles.

Operating lever for the three-position disconnector, only for switchgear with a panel width of 600 mm (spring-operated mechanism / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism)

Fig. 17: Operating lever for DISCONNECTING function Fig. 18: Operating lever for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function.

Page 45: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 45

Description

• Hand crank to charge the circuit-breaker closing spring

Operating lever for the three-position disconnector, for switchgear with panel widths of 600 and 900 mm (spring-operated mechanism / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism / slow motion mechanism

Fig. 19: Operating lever for DISCONNECTING function Fig. 20: Operating lever for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function.

Identification on the operating levers for switchgear with panel widths of 600 and 900 mm

Type of

operating

mechanism

Spring-operated mechanism /

Spring-operated/stored-energy

mechanism

Slow motion mechanism

Symbol

600 mm panel width 900 mm panel width

Turn operating lever by 90°. Turn operating lever by 180°.

Page 46: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

46 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

• Adapter for emergency operation (to be used only with a panel width of 900 mm and

motor operating mechanism)

• Double-bit key

• Torx screwdriver T25 to open the cable compartment cover

Other accessories According to the order documents/purchase order (selection):

• HV HRC fuse-links

• Cable plugs / adapter systems

• Surge arresters / limiters

• Test fuses for mechanical simulation of the striker of HV HRC fuse-links in transformer

feeders / contactor panels with extension tube

• LRM voltage indicators

• Test units to check the capacitive interface and the voltage indicators

Fig. 21: Double-bit key with a diameter of 3 mm (door of low-voltage compartment)

Fig. 22: Double-bit key with a diameter of 5 mm (voltage transformer disconnector and door of low-voltage compartment)

Page 47: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 47

Description

• Phase comparison test units (e.g. make Pfisterer type EPV, KRIES type CAP-Phase)

9 Technical data

9.1 Complete switchgear

General electrical data

Rated voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

- phase-to-phase, phase-to-earth, open contact gap

kV 20 28 1) 36 38 50

- across isolating distance kV 23 32 1) 39 45 60

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage

- phase-to-phase, phase-to-earth, open contact gap

kV 60 75 1) 95 95 125

- across isolating distance kV 70 85 1) 110 110 145

Rated frequency Hz 50/60

Rated short-circuit breaking current kA 31.5 25

Rated short-circuit making current kA 50/63/80

Rated peak withstand current kA 50/63/80

Rated short-time withstand current kA max. 31.5 (3 s) max. 25 (3 s)

Rated normal current of busbar, max. A 1250/1600/2000/2500

Rated normal current for incoming and outgoing feeders

A 630/1000/1250/2000/2500 630/1000/1250/2000

Rated normal current for switch-disconnector panel, max. (depending on fuse-link)

A 50 - 250

Rated normal current

- Contactor panel without fuses A 450

- Contactor panel with fuses A 450 2)

Ring-main panel A 630

Temperature range oC -5 to +55

1) Higher rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage available with:- 42/95 kV for phase-to-phase, phase-to-earth, open contact gap- 48/110 kV across isolating distance

2) Depending on HV HRC fuse-link. Observe let-through current of HV HRC fuse.

Page 48: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

48 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Test voltages for busbarvoltage transformers at 50

Hz

The busbar voltage transformers can be tested together with the switchgear at 80% of

the rated short-duration power-frequency voltage.

High-voltage testequipment

The following table shows the current consumption per panel for dimensioning the high-

voltage test equipment. The test voltage is applied through an outgoing feeder panel of

NXPLUS C. Further panels to be tested are switched off during the test.

Power losses per panel

Primary voltage [kV] Standard Rated short-duration power-

frequency withstand voltage

[kV]

80% permissible test

value [kV]

up to 3.6 IEC 10 8.0

up to 7.2 IEC 20 16.0

GB 23 18.4

GOST 32 25.6

up to 12 IEC 28 22.4

GB 42 33.6

GOST 42 33.6

up to 17.5 IEC 38 30.4

up to 24 IEC 50 40.0

Test voltage [kV] Current consumption of the

incoming panel [mA]

Current consumption of further

panels (busbar) [mA]

50 10 5

Rated voltage

[kV]

7.2 12 15 17.5 24

Rated normal

current [A]

400 70 W

630 160 W

800 250 W

1000 400 W

1250 600 W

2000 1100 W

2300 1100 W - -

2500 1300 W - -

Page 49: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 49

Description

Phase sequence

Fig. 23: Phase sequence of bushings in the busbar compartment

Fig. 24: Phase sequence of bushings in the cable compartment

Gas leakage rate The gas leakage rate is < 0.1% per year (referred to the absolute gas pressure).

Page 50: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

50 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

9.2 Classification of NXPLUS C according to IEC 62 271-200

Design and construction

Internal arc classification

9.3 Standards, specifications, guidelines

Basic prescriptions andstandards

The fixed-mounted circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C for indoor installation complies

with the following prescriptions and standards:

Partition class PM (metallic partition)

Loss of service continuity category 1)

Panels - with HV HRC fuses LSC 2A

- without HV HRC fuses LSC 2B

Accessibility to compartments (enclosure)

- Busbar compartment: Tool-based

- Switching device compartment Non-accessible

- Low-voltage compartment Tool-based

- Cable compartment - without HV HRC fuses Tool-based

- with HV HRC fuses Interlock-controlled and tool-based

1) The loss of service continuity category is always referred to the complete switchgear, i.e. the panel with the lowest category determines the loss of service continuity category of the complete switchgear.

Designation of the internal arc classification IAC 7.2, 12, 15 kV 17.5, 24 kV

IAC class for - Wall-standing arrangement

IAC A FL 31.5 kA, 1 s IAC A FL 25 kA, 1 s

- Free-standing arrangement

IAC FLR 31.5 kA, 1 s IAC FLR 25 kA, 1 s

Type of accessibility A Switchgear in closed electrical service location, access "for authorized personnel only" according to IEC 62 271-200

- F Front

- L Lateral

- R Rear (for free-standing arrangement)

Arc test current 25 kA, 31.5 kA

Test duration 1 s

IEC/EN standard VDE standard

Switchgear 62 271-1 0670-1

62 271-200 0671-200

Switching devices Circuit-breakers 62 271-100 0671-100

Vacuum contactors 60 470 0670-501

Disconnectors/earthing switches 62 271-102 0671-102

Switch-disconnectors 60 265-1 0670-301

Switch-disconnector/fuse combination 62 271-105 0671-105

HV HRC fuses 60 282 0670-4

Voltage detecting systems 61 243-5 0682-415

Degree of protection 60 529 0470-1

Insulation 60 071 0111

Instrument transformers Current transformers 60 044-1 0414-1

Voltage transformers 60 044-2 0414-2

SF6 60 376 0373-1

Installation and erection 61 936-1 / HD 637 -S1 0101

Page 51: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 51

Description

The vacuum interrupters fitted in the vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55 and the vacuum

contactor 3TL72, 3TL73 and 3TL74 are type-approved in accordance with the X-ray

regulations of the Federal Republic of Germany. They conform to the requirements of the

X-ray regulations of January 8, 1987 (Federal Law Gazette I Page 144) §8 and Annex III

Section 5 up to rated short-duration power-frequency voltage stipulated in accordance

with IEC/DIN VDE (rated power-frequency withstand voltage).

Electromagneticcompatibility - EMC

The a.m. standards as well as the "EMC Guideline for Switchgear"* are applied during

design, manufacture and erection of the switchgear. Installation, connection and

maintenance have to be performed in accordance with the stipulations of the operating

instructions. For operation, the legal stipulations applicable at the place of installation

have to be observed additionally. In this way, the switchgear assemblies of this type

series fulfill the basic protection requirments of the EMC guideline.

The switchgear operator / owner must keep the technical documents suplied with the

switchgear throughout the entire service life, and keep them up-to-date in case of

modifications of the switchgear.

* (Dr. Bernd Jäkel, Ansgar Müller; Medium-Voltage Systems - EMC Guideline for

Switchgear; A&D ATS SR/PTD M SP)

Protection against solidforeign objects, electric

shock and water

The panels of NXPLUS C fulfill the following degrees of protection according to

IEC 62 271-200, IEC 60 529 and DIN VDE 0671-200:

• IP3XD standard for switchgear enclosure of operating front and side walls

• IP31D option for switchgear enclosure of operating front and side walls

• IP32D option for switchgear enclosure of operating front and side walls

• IP34D option for switchgear enclosure of operating front and side walls

• IP65 for parts under high voltage in switchgear panels without HV HRC fuses

Aseismic capacity (option) NXPLUS C switchgear can be upgraded for regions at risk from earthquakes. For

upgrading, earthquake qualification testing has been carried out in accordance with the

following standards:

• IEC 68-3-3, 1993

• IEC 68-2-6, 1995

• IABG TA13-TM-002/98 (guide)

Within the range of the prevailing earthquake frequencies from 1 Hz to 35 Hz, the

category 1 required response spectrum to IABG TA13-TM-002/98 covers the following

response spectra:

• Uniform Building Code zone 3

• Seismic Requirements Spec. 9067; Department of Water&Power, Los Angeles

• GTS – 1.013 ENDESA, Chile

• IEC 61 166

Page 52: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

52 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

9.4 Selection of HV HRC fuse-links

The three-position switch-disconnector in the transformer feeder (transformer switch)

was combined with HV HRC fuse-links and tested in accordance with IEC 62 271-105.

The following fuse protection tables show HV HRC fuse-links recommended for the

protection of transformers, motors and voltage transformers in the metering panel.

Furthermore, the switchgear also permits fuse protection of transformers up to ratings

of 2000 kVA. Please contact us for such applications.

The fuse protection tables apply to:

• Maximum ambient air temperature in the switchgear room of 40 °C according to IEC

62 271-1/VDE 0670-1000 considering the influence of the switchgear enclosure

• Requirements according to IEC 62 271-105

• Protection of distribution transformers according to IEC 60 787/VDE 0670-402

• Rated power of transformer (no overload operation)

The specified HV HRC fuses make SIBA are type-tested partial range fuses according to

IEC 60 282-1. The dimensions correspond to DIN 43625. The HV HRC fuses have a

thermal protection in form of a temperature-limiting striker tripping operating in case of

defective HV HRC fuse-links or high overload currents.

Please contact us if you want to use HV HRC fuses from other manufacturers.

Basis for selection of HV HRC fuse-links:

• IEC 60 282-1

• IEC 62 271-105/VDE 0671-105

• IEC 60 787/VDE 0670-402

• Recommendations, data sheets of fuse manufacturers

• Permissible power loss at 40° C in the NXPLUS C switchgear enclosure

Page 53: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 53

Description

9.5 Transformer protection table (with HV HRC fuses make SIBA)

Transformer Rated normal current HV HRC fuse

Operating

voltage

Rated power Relative

impedance voltage

Rated

current

Minimum value Maximum value

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A]

6 - 7,2 50 4 4,8 10 16

75 4 7,2 16 16

100 4 9,6 16 20

125 4 12 20 25

160 4 15,4 31,5 31,5

200 4 19,2 31,5 40

250 4 24 40 50

315 4 30,3 50 63

400 4 38,4 63 80

500 4 48 80 100

630 4 61 100 125

10 - 12 50 4 2,9 10 10

75 4 4,3 10 10

100 4 5,8 16 16

125 4 7,2 16 16

160 4 9,3 20 20

200 4 11,5 25 25

250 4 14,5 25 31,5

315 4 18,3 31,5 40

400 4 23,1 40 50

500 4 29 50 63

630 4 36,4 63 80

800 5 - 6 46,2 63 80

1000 5 - 6 58 100 100

13,8 50 4 2,1 6,3 6,3

75 4 3,2 6,3 10

100 4 4,2 10 16

125 4 5,3 10 16

160 4 6,7 16 16

200 4 8,4 16 20

250 4 10,5 20 25

315 4 13,2 25 31,5

400 4 16,8 31,5 31,5

500 4 21 40 40

630 4 26,4 50 50

800 5 - 6 33,5 63 63

1000 5 - 6 41,9 80 80

1250 5 - 6 52,3 100 100

Page 54: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

54 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

15 - 17,5 50 4 1,9 6,3 6,3

75 4 2,9 6,3 6,3

100 4 3,9 10 10

125 4 4,8 16 16

160 4 6,2 16 16

200 4 7,7 20 20

250 4 9,7 25 25

315 4 12,2 31,5 31,5

400 4 15,5 31,5 31,5

500 4 19,3 31,5 40

630 4 24,3 40 63

800 5 - 6 30,9 63 63

1000 5 - 6 38,5 80 80

1250 5 - 6 48,2 100 100

20 - 23 50 4 1,5 6,3 6,3

75 4 2,2 6,3 6,3

100 4 2,9 6,3 6,3

125 4 3,6 10 10

160 4 4,7 10 10

200 4 5,8 16 16

250 4 7,3 16 16

315 4 9,2 16 20

400 4 11,6 20 25

500 4 14,5 25 31,5

630 4 18,2 31,5 40

800 5 - 6 23,1 31,5 31,5

1000 5 - 6 29 50 50

1250 5 - 6 36 50 63

1600 5 - 6 46,5 80 100

2000 5 - 6 57,8 100 100

Transformer Rated normal current HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage

Rated power Relative impedance

voltage

Rated current

Minimum value Maximum value

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A]

Page 55: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 55

Description

Fuse protection table for TR panel of NXPLUS C (with HV HRC fuses make SIBA)

Transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating

voltage

Rated power Relative

impedance voltage

Rated

current

Rated current Reference

dimension

Order No.

SIBA

Order No.

extension tube SIBA

Part number

Siemens extension tube

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A] Ir [A] e [mm]

6 - 7,2 50 4 4,8 10 292 30 098 13.10 34 006 01 02911500

10 292 30 004 13.10 34 006 01 02911500

10 442 30 101 13.10 --- ---

16 292 30 098 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 292 30 004 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 101 13.16 --- ---

75 4 7,2 16 292 30 098 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 292 30 004 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 101 13.16 --- ---

100 4 9,6 16 292 30 098 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 292 30 004 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 101 13.16 --- ---

20 292 30 098 13.20 34 006 01 02911500

20 292 30 004 13.20 34 006 01 02911500

20 442 30 101 13.20 --- ---

125 4 12 20 292 30 098 13.20 34 006 01 02911500

20 292 30 004 13.20 34 006 01 02911500

20 442 30 101 13.20 --- ---

25 292 30 098 13.25 34 006 01 02911500

25 292 30 004 13.25 34 006 01 02911500

25 442 30 101 13.25 --- ---

160 4 15,4 31,5 292 30 098 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 292 30 004 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 442 30 101 13.31.5 --- ---

200 4 19,2 31,5 292 30 098 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 292 30 004 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 442 30 101 13.31.5 --- ---

40 292 30 098 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 292 30 004 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 442 30 101 13.40 --- ---

250 4 24 40 292 30 098 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 292 30 004 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 442 30 101 13.40 --- ---

50 292 30 098 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 292 30 004 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 30 101 13.50 --- ---

315 4 30,3 50 292 30 098 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 292 30 004 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 30 101 13.50 --- ---

63 292 30 012 43.63 34 006 01 02911500

Page 56: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

56 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

6 - 7,2 400 4 38,4 63 292 30 099 13.63 34 006 01 02911500

63 292 30 012 13.63 34 006 01 02911500

63 442 30 102 13.63 --- ---

63 292 30 012 43.63 34 006 01 02911500

80 292 30 012 43.80 34 006 01 02911500

80 442 30 102 43.80 --- ---

500 4 48 80 292 30 012 43.80 34 006 01 02911500

80 442 30 102 43.80 --- ---

80 292 30 099 13.80 34 006 01 02911500

80 292 30 012 13.80 34 006 01 02911500

80 442 30 102 13.80 --- ---

100 292 30 012 43.100 34 006 01 02911500

100 442 30 102 43.100 --- ---

630 4 61 100 292 30 099 13.100 34 006 01 02911500

100 292 30 012 13.100 34 006 01 02911500

100 442 30 102 13.100 --- ---

100 292 30 012 43.100 34 006 01 02911500

100 442 30 102 43.100 --- ---

125 292 30 020 43.125 34 006 01 02911500

125 442 30 103 43.125 --- ---

10 - 12 50 4 2,9 10 292 30 004 13.10 34 006 01 02911500

10 442 30 101 13.10 --- ---

10 292 30 255 13.10 34 006 01 02911500

10 442 30 231 13.10 --- ---

10 442 30 006 13.10 --- ---

75 4 4,3 10 292 30 004 13.10 34 006 01 02911500

10 442 30 101 13.10 --- ---

10 292 30 255 13.10 34 006 01 02911500

10 442 30 231 13.10 --- ---

10 442 30 006 13.10 --- ---

100 4 5,8 16 292 30 004 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 101 13.16 --- ---

16 292 30 255 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

125 4 7,2 16 292 30 004 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 101 13.16 --- ---

16 292 30 255 13.16 34 006 01 02911500

16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

160 4 9,3 20 292 30 004 13.20 34 006 01 02911500

20 442 30 101 13.20 --- ---

20 292 30 221 13.20 34 006 01 02911500

20 442 30 231 13.20 --- ---

20 442 30 006 13.20 --- ---

Transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage

Rated power Relative impedance

voltage

Rated current

Rated current Reference dimension

Order No. SIBA

Order No. extension tube

SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tube

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A] Ir [A] e [mm]

Page 57: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 57

Description

10 - 12 200 4 11,5 25 292 30 004 13.25 34 006 01 02911500

25 442 30 101 13.25 --- ---

25 292 30 221 13.25 34 006 01 02911500

25 442 30 231 13.25 --- ---

25 442 30 006 13.25 --- ---

250 4 14,5 25 292 30 004 13.25 34 006 01 02911500

25 442 30 101 13.25 --- ---

25 292 30 221 13.25 34 006 01 02911500

25 442 30 231 13.25 --- ---

25 442 30 006 13.25 --- ---

31,5 292 30 004 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 442 30 101 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 292 30 221 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

315 4 18,3 31,5 292 30 004 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 442 30 101 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 292 30 221 13.31.5 34 006 01 02911500

31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

40 292 30 004 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 442 30 101 13.40 --- ---

40 292 30 221 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 442 30 231 13.40 --- ---

40 442 30 006 13.40 --- ---

400 4 23,1 40 292 30 004 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 442 30 101 13.40 --- ---

40 292 30 221 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

40 442 30 231 13.40 --- ---

40 442 30 006 13.40 --- ---

50 292 30 004 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 30 101 13.50 --- ---

50 292 30 221 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 30 232 13.50 --- ---

50 442 30 014 13.50 --- ---

500 4 29 50 292 30 004 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 30 101 13.50 --- ---

50 292 30 221 13.50 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 30 232 13.50 --- ---

50 442 30 014 13.50 --- ---

63 292 30 012 43.63 34 006 01 02911500

63 442 30 014 43.63 --- ---

Transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage

Rated power Relative impedance

voltage

Rated current

Rated current Reference dimension

Order No. SIBA

Order No. extension tube

SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tube

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A] Ir [A] e [mm]

Page 58: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

58 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

10 - 12 630 4 36,4 63 292 30 012 13.63 34 006 01 02911500

63 442 30 102 13.63 --- ---

63 442 30 232 13.63 --- ---

63 292 30 012 43.63 34 006 01 02911500

63 442 30 014 43.63 --- ---

80 292 30 012 43.80 34 006 01 02911500

80 442 30 102 43.80 --- ---

80 442 30 014 43.80 --- ---

800 5 - 6 46,2 63 292 30 012 13.63 34 006 01 02911500

63 442 30 102 13.63 --- ---

80 292 30 012 43.80 34 006 01 02911500

80 442 30 102 43.80 --- ---

1000 5 - 6 58 100 292 30 012 43.100 34 006 01 02911500

100 442 30 102 43.100 --- ---

100 442 30 022 43.100 --- ---

13,8 50 4 2,1 6,3 442 30 231 13.6.3 --- ---

6,3 442 30 006 13.6.3 --- ---

75 4 3,2 6,3 442 30 231 13.6.3 --- ---

10 442 30 231 13.10 --- ---

10 442 30 006 13.10 --- ---

100 4 4,2 10 442 30 231 13.10 --- ---

16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

125 4 5,3 10 442 30 231 13.10 --- ---

16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

160 4 6,7 16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

200 4 8,4 16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

20 442 30 231 13.20 --- ---

20 442 30 006 13.20 --- ---

250 4 10,5 20 442 30 231 13.20 --- ---

25 442 30 231 13.25 --- ---

25 442 30 006 13.25 --- ---

315 4 13,2 25 442 30 231 13.25 --- ---

31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

400 4 16,8 31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

500 4 21 40 442 30 231 13.40 --- ---

40 442 30 006 13.40 --- ---

630 4 26,4 50 442 30 232 13.50 --- ---

50 442 30 014 13.50 --- ---

800 5 - 6 33,5 63 442 30 232 13.63 --- ---

63 442 30 014 13.63 --- ---

63 442 30 014 43.63 --- ---

1000 5 - 6 41,9 80 442 30 014 43.80 --- ---

1250 5 - 6 52,3 100 442 30 022 43.100 --- ---

Transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage

Rated power Relative impedance

voltage

Rated current

Rated current Reference dimension

Order No. SIBA

Order No. extension tube

SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tube

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A] Ir [A] e [mm]

Page 59: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 59

Description

15-17,5 50 4 1,9 6,3 442 30 231 13.6.3 --- ---

6,3 442 30 006 13.6.3 --- ---

75 4 2,9 6,3 442 30 231 13.6.3 --- ---

100 4 3,9 10 442 30 231 13.10 --- ---

125 4 4,8 16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

160 4 6,2 16 442 30 231 13.16 --- ---

200 4 7,7 20 442 30 231 13.20 --- ---

20 442 30 006 13.20 --- ---

250 4 9,7 25 442 30 231 13.25 --- ---

25 442 30 006 13.25 --- ---

315 4 12,2 31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

400 4 15,5 31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

500 4 19,3 31,5 442 30 231 13.31.5 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

40 442 30 231 13.40 --- ---

40 442 30 006 13.40 --- ---

630 4 24,3 40 442 30 231 13.40 --- ---

40 442 30 006 13.40 --- ---

50 442 30 232 13.50 --- ---

50 442 30 014 13.50 --- ---

63 442 30 014 43.63 --- ---

800 5 - 6 30,9 63 442 30 014 43.63 --- ---

1000 5 - 6 38,5 80 442 30 014 43.80 --- ---

1250 5 - 6 48,2 100 442 30 022 43.100 --- ---

Transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage

Rated power Relative impedance

voltage

Rated current

Rated current Reference dimension

Order No. SIBA

Order No. extension tube

SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tube

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A] Ir [A] e [mm]

Page 60: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

60 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

20-23 50 4 1,5 6,3 442 30 006 13.6.3 --- ---

75 4 2,2 6,3 442 30 006 13.6.3 --- ---

100 4 2,9 6,3 442 30 006 13.6.3 --- ---

125 4 3,6 10 442 30 006 13.10 --- ---

160 4 4,7 10 442 30 006 13.10 --- ---

200 4 5,8 16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

250 4 7,3 16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

315 4 9,2 16 442 30 006 13.16 --- ---

20 442 30 006 13.20 --- ---

400 4 11,6 20 442 30 006 13.20 --- ---

25 442 30 006 13.25 --- ---

500 4 14,5 25 442 30 006 13.25 --- ---

31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

630 4 18,2 31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

40 442 30 006 13.40 --- ---

800 5 - 6 23,1 31,5 442 30 006 13.31.5 --- ---

1000 5 - 6 29 50 442 30 014 13.50 --- ---

1250 5 - 6 36 50 442 30 014 13.50 --- ---

63 442 30 014 43.63 --- ---

1600 5 - 6 46,5 80 442 30 014 43.80 --- ---

100 442 30 022 43.100 --- ---

2000 5 - 6 57,8 100 442 30 022 43.100 --- ---

Transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage

Rated power Relative impedance

voltage

Rated current

Rated current Reference dimension

Order No. SIBA

Order No. extension tube

SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tube

U [kV] SN [kVA] uK [%] I1 [A] Ir [A] e [mm]

Page 61: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 61

Description

9.6 Motor protection table (with HV HRC fuses make SIBA)

Number of

starts per hour

Maximum permissible motor starting current in A at rated current of fuse

40 A 50 A 63 A 80 A 100 A 125 A 160 A 200 A 224 A 250 A

3,3 - 7,2 kV yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

>7,2 - 12 kV yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no

>12 - 23 kV yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no

HV motors with starting times up to 5 s

2 95 115 135 160 210 285 370 765 860 960

4 85 105 120 145 190 255 330 705 840 960

8 75 95 110 130 170 230 300 640 760 960

16 70 85 95 115 150 205 270 575 680 925

32 63 75 85 105 140 185 245 520 615 840

HV motors with starting times up to 15 s

2 90 105 120 145 190 245 320 625 730 960

4 80 95 110 130 170 220 285 560 655 890

8 70 85 100 120 155 200 260 510 595 805

16 65 75 90 105 140 180 230 455 535 720

32 60 70 80 95 125 160 210 410 485 655

HV motors with starting times up to30 s

2 85 100 115 140 185 230 300 555 645 865

4 75 90 105 125 165 210 270 500 575 780

8 70 80 95 115 150 190 240 450 525 705

16 60 75 85 100 135 170 215 405 470 630

32 55 65 75 90 120 155 195 365 425 570

Page 62: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

62 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fuse protection table for Vacuum-contactor(with HV HRC fuses make SIBA)

9.7 Fuse protection table for metering panel (with HV HRC fuses make SIBA)

Motor HV HRC fuse

Operating

voltage

Rated current of

fuse

Reference

dimension

Max. Rated current Order No.

SIBA

Order No.

extension tube SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tube

U [kV] Ir [A] e [mm] I [A]

3,3 - 7,2 40 292 33 30 098 13.40 34 006 01 02911500

50 442 36 30 108 53.50 --- ---

63 442 46 30 108 53.63 --- ---

80 442 54 30 108 53.80 --- ---

100 442 64 30 108 53.100 --- ---

125 442 81 30 109 53.125 --- ---

160 442 103 30 109 53.160 --- ---

200 442 129 30 110 54.200 --- ---

224 442 141 30 110 54.224 --- ---

250 442 153 30 110 54.250 --- ---

>7,2 - 12 40 442 33 30 101 13.40 --- ---

50 442 36 30 101 53.50 --- ---

63 442 46 30 101 53.63 --- ---

80 442 54 30 102 53.80 --- ---

100 442 60 30 102 53.100 --- ---

125 442 69 30 102 53.125 --- ---

160 442 76 30 103 53.160 --- ---

>12 - 23 40 442 25 30 006 13.40 --- ---

50 442 32 30 014 13.50 --- ---

63 442 36 30 014 43.63 --- ---

80 442 46 30 014 43.80 --- ---

100 442 57 30 022 43.100 --- ---

Voltage transformer HV HRC fuse

Operating voltage Rated current of fuse Reference dimension

Order No. SIBA Order No. extension tube

SIBA

Part number Siemens

extension tubeU [kV] Ir [A] e [mm]

3,3 - 5,5 6,3 292 30 098 13.6.3 34 006 01 02911500

6,0 - 7,2 0,5 292 30 004 11.0.5 34 006 01 02911500

2,0 292 30 004 13.2 34 006 01 02911500

4,0 292 30 004 13.4 34 006 01 02911500

6,3 292 30 098 13.6.3 34 006 01 02911500

> 7,2 - 12 0,5 292 30 004 13.0.5 34 006 01 02911500

2,0 292 30 004 13.2 34 006 01 02911500

4,0 292 30 004 13.4 34 006 01 02911500

6,3 442 30 101 13.6.3 --- ---

> 12 - 23 0,5 442 30 006 11.0.5 --- ---

2,0 442 30 006 13.2 --- ---

4,0 442 30 006 13.4 --- ---

6,3 442 30 006 13.6.3 --- ---

Page 63: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 63

Description

9.8 Rating plates

The rating plates contain all relevant data for the switchpanel and its components.

Rating plates are located:

• On the inside of the door of the low-voltage compartment (rating plates for

switchpanel, current/voltage transformer)

IAC classification This data (see item h) describes the internal arc classification of the panel according to

IEC 62271-200.

The IAC classification is referred to each panel. The data on the rating plate (see item h)

describes the areas classified for the corresponding panel.

(see Page 50, "Classification of NXPLUS C according to IEC 62 271-200")

Fig. 25: Rating plate: Switchpanel

a Switchgear type

s Serial number

d Year of manufacture

f Panel number

g Technical data

h Internal arc classification (option)

j Test mark for the performed acceptance test (German: Abnahme-Prüfung) (pressure test) of the vessel

Page 64: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

64 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

9.9 Vacuum circuit-breaker

Number of operatingcycles

Fig. 26: Permissible number of operating cycles n as a function of the breaking current Ia (r.m.s.

value) in kA

Operating times

Rated normal current 10 000 times

Short-circuit breaking current 50 times

Operating times Component Item designation Duration Unit

Closing time 75 ms

Charging time <15 s

Opening time Shunt release (Y1) <65 ms

Additional release 3AX 11

(Y2), (Y4), (Y6), (Y7) <50 ms

Arcing time <15 ms

Break time Shunt release (Y1) <80 ms

Additional release 3AX 11

(Y2), (Y4), (Y6), (Y7) <65 ms

Dead time 300 ms

Close-open contact time Shunt release (Y1) <75 ms

Additional release 3AX 11

(Y2), (Y4), (Y6), (Y7) <60 ms

Minimum command duration

CLOSE Closing solenoid (Y9) 45 ms

OPEN Shunt release (Y1) 40 ms

OPEN Additional release 3AX 11

(Y2), (Y4), (Y6), (Y7) 20 ms

Shortest impulse duration of the c.b. tripping signal

10 ms

Page 65: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 65

Description

Closing time The interval of time between the initiation (command) of the closing operation and the

instant when the contacts touch in all poles.

Opening time The interval of time between the initiation (command) of the opening operation and the

instant when the contacts separate in all poles.

Arcing time The interval of time from the first initiation of an arc and the instant of final arc extinction

in all poles.

Break time The interval of time between the initiation (command) of the opening operation and the

instant of final arc extinction in the last-pole-to-clear (=opening time and arcing time).

Close-open contact time The interval of time - in a make-break operating cycle - between the instant when the

contacts touch in the first pole in the closing process, and the instant when the contacts

separate in all poles in the subsequent opening process.

Motor operatingmechanism

The operating mechanisms of the 3AH55 vacuum circuit-breakers are suitable for auto-

reclosing. For DC operation, the maximum power consumption is approx. 350 W. For AC

operation, the maximum power consumption is approx. 400 VA.

Rated operating sequences:

Rapid transfer (U): O-t-CO-t'-CO (t, t'= 3 min)

Auto-reclosing (K): O-t-CO-t'-CO (t= 0.3 s, t'= 3 min)

Multiple auto-reclosing: O-t-CO-t'-CO-t'-CO-t'-CO (t= 0.3 s, t'= 15 s)

The rated current of the motor protection equipment is shown in the following table:

The supply voltage may deviate from the rated supply voltage specified in the table by -

15% to +10%.

The breaking capacity of the auxiliary switch 3SV92 is shown on the following table:

Rated supply voltage [V] Recommended rated current for the protection equipment*

[A]

DC 24 8

DC 48 6

DC 60 4

DC / AC 110, 50 / 60 Hz 2

DC 220 / AC 230, 50 / 60 Hz 1.6

*) M.c.b. assembly type 8RL74 or m.c.b. with G-characteristic

Breaking capacity Operating voltage [V] Normal current [A]

AC 40 to 60 Hz up to 230 10

Resistive load Inductive load

DC 24 10 10

48 10 9

60 9 7

110 5 4

220 2.5 2

Page 66: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

66 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Closing solenoid (Y9) The closing solenoid 3AY1510 closes the circuit-breaker. After completion of a closing

operation, the closing solenoid is de-energized internally. It is available for AC or DC

voltage. Power consumption: 140 W or 140 VA.

Shunt releases Shunt releases are used for automatic or deliberate tripping of circuit-breakers. They are

designed for connection to external voltage (DC or AC voltage). They can also be

connected to a voltage transformer for deliberate tripping.

Shunt releases based on two different principles are used:

• The shunt release (Y1) 3AY1510 is used as standard in the basic circuit-breaker

version. With this design, the circuit-breaker is opened electrically. Power

consumption: 140 W or 140 VA.

• The shunt release (Y2) 3AX1101 with energy store is fitted if more than one shunt

release is required. With this design, the electrical opening command is transferred

magnetically and thus, the circuit-breaker is opened. Power consumption: 70 W or

50 VA.

Undervoltage release Untervoltage releases (Y7) 3AX1103 are tripped automatically through an

electromagnet or deliberately. The deliberate tripping of the undervoltage release

generally takes place via an NC contact in the tripping circuit or via an NO contact by

short-circuiting the magnet coil. With this type of tripping, the short-circuit current is

limited by the built-in resistors. Power consumption: 20 W or 20 VA.

Circuit-breaker trippingsignal

When the circuit-breaker is tripped by a release (e.g. by protection tripping) there is a

signal through the NO contact -S6. If the circuit-breaker is tripped deliberately with the

mechanical pushbutton, this signal is suppressed by the NC contact -S7.

C.t-operated releases (Y4,Y6)

The following c.t.-operated releases are available:

• The c.t.-operated release (Y4) 3AX1102 consists of an energy store, an unlatching

mechanism and an electromagnetic system. Rated tripping current 0.5 A/1 A

• The c.t.-operated release (Y6) 3AX1104 (low-energy release) is adequate for a tripping

pulse of ≤ 0.1 Ws in connection with adequate protection systems. It is used if

auxiliary voltage is missing, tripping via protection relay.

Varistor module

The inductances of the circuit-breaker operating mechanism and the circuit-breaker

control system (motor, closing solenoid, shunt release and auxiliary contactor) are

equipped with the varistor module 3AX1526 for DC operation. The module limits the

overvoltage to approx. 500 V and is available for rated operating voltages from 60 V (DC)

up to 220 V (DC). It contains two separate varistor circuits.

ATTENTION!

Switching overvoltages can damage electronic control devices.

Do not switch off inductive consumers in DC circuits.

Page 67: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 67

Description

9.10 Three-position disconnector for circuit-breaker, disconnector and bus sectionalizer panels ≥ 1000 A

9.11 Three-position switch-disconnector for switch-disconnector panels, ring-main panels and circuit-breaker panels up to 630 A, contactor panel and metering panel

Rated

voltage kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

current A ≥ 1000/1250/2000/2500 ≥ 1000/1250/2000

short-time withstand current kA (3 s) 31.5 25

peak withstand current kA 80 kA 63 kA

Bemessungs-

Rated voltage Ur kV 7.2 12 15 17.5 24

Rated insulation level

Rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage

Ud kV 20 28 35 38 50

Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Uw kV 60 75 95 95 125

Rated frequency fr Hz 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

Rated normal current for

panels without HV HRC fuses Ir A 630 630 630 630 630

transformer feeders 1) Ir A 200 200 200 200 200

Rated short-time withstand current

Panels without HV HRC fuses

for switchgear with tk = 1 s

tk up to kA 20/25 20/25 20/25 20/25 20/-

for switchgear with tk = 3 s

tk kA 20/- 20/- 20/- 20/- 20/-

Panels with HV HRC fuses

for switchgear with tk = 1 s

tk up to kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25

for switchgear with tk = 3 s

tk kA 31.5 31.5 31.5 25 25

Rated peak withstand current

Panels without HV HRC fuses Ip up to kA 50/63 50/63 50/63 50/63 50/-

Panels with HV HRC fuses Ip up to kA 80 80 80 63 63

Rated short-circuit making current

Transformer feeders 2) Ima kA 80 80 80 63 63

Ring-main feeders Ima up to kA 50/63 50/63 50/63 50/63 50/-

1) Depending on HV HRC fuse-link

2) Depending on let-through current of HV HRC fuse-link

Page 68: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Description

68 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

9.12 Endurance classes

The switching devices of NXPLUS C switchgear conform to the classes according to

IEC 62 271-100, -102 und 60 265-1.

Overview

Circuit-breaker

Three-positiondisconnector

Three-position switch-disconnector

Panel type Circuit-breaker Disconnector Switch-discon-

nector

Earthing switch

Circuit-breaker panel M2 M0 - - E2 1)

E2

C2

Vacuum contactor panel 2) M0 E2

Disconnector panel M0 E0

Switch-disconnector panel M0 M1 E3 E2

Ring-main panel M0 M1 E3 E2

Metering panel M0 M1 E3 E21) By closing the circuit-breaker

2) For vacuum contactors, no classes have been defined in the standard.

Function Class Standard Property

BREAKING M2 IEC 62 271-100 10,000 times mechanically without maintenance

E2 IEC 62 271-100 10,000 times rated normal current without maintenance

C2 IEC 62 271-100 Very low probability of restrikes

Function Class Standard Property

DISCONNECTING M0 IEC 62 271-102 1000 times mechanically without maintenance

READY-TO-EARTH 1000 times mechanically without maintenance

EARTHING E2 1) IEC 62 271-102 5 times rated short-circuit making current Ima without maintenance

1) By closing the circuit-breaker

Function Class Standard Property

DISCONNECTING M0 IEC 62 271-102 1000 times mechanically without maintenance

LOAD BREAKING M1 IEC 60 265-1 1000 times mechanically without maintenance

E3 IEC 60 265-1 100 times rated mainly active load

breaking current I1 2) without maintenance

5 times rated short-circuit making current Ima without maintenance

EARTHING E2 1) IEC 62 271-102 5 times rated short-circuit making current I mawithout maintenance

2) In addition to I1, class E3 also covers the test currents I2a, I4a, I4b, I6a and I6b

Page 69: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 69

Description

9.13 Vacuum contactor

10 End of service life

SF6 gas

Before recycling the materials, evacuate the SF6 gas professionally and prepare it for

further use.

Recycling The NXPLUS C switchgear is an environmentally compatible product.

The components of the switchgear can be recycled in an environmentally compatible

way by dismantling into sorted scrap and residual mixed scrap.

After evacuating the SF6 gas, the switchgear mainly consists of the following materials:

• Sheet-steel, galvanized (enclosure and operating mechanisms)

• Stainless steel (vessel)

• Copper (conductor bars)

• Silver (contacts)

• Cast-resin based on epoxy resin (bushings and fuse boxes)

• Plastic material (arcing chamber and fuse slide)

• Silicone rubber

The switchgear can be recycled in ecological manner in compliance with existing

legislation.

Auxiliary devices such as short-circuit indicators have to be recycled as electronic scrap.

Batteries have to be recycled professionally.

As delivered by Siemens, the switchgear does not contain hazardous materials as per

the Hazardous Material Regulations applicable in the Federal Republic of Germany. For

operation in other countries, the locally applicable regulations must be followed.

For further information please contact your regional Siemens representative.

Rated voltage 7.2/12/17.5/24 kV

Rated current 450 A

Rated short-time withstand current 8 kA (1 s)

Rated peak withstand current 20 kA

Number of operating cycles at rated normal current:

100 000 or 500 000 operating cycles

Auxiliary switch 3 NO + 4 NC or 5 NO + 6 NO freely available

Counter Option

Short-circuit breaking current 4 kA

NOTE!

The SF6 gas contained in this panel has to be prepared for further use and must not be

released into the atmosphere. For any questions, please contact your regional Siemens

representative.

Observe the instructions.

Page 70: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

70 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Installation

11 Constructional stipulations

11.1 Switchgear room

Please observe the following points while preparing the switchgear room:

• Base frame and switchgear dimensions (see delivery note)

• Transport ways to the switchgear room

• Distribution and intermediate storage spaces

• Size of the room and the doors

• Construction and load-bearing capacity of the floor

• Illumination, heating, power and water supply

• Dimensions of installation scaffoldings and foundation rails

• Installation of high-voltage cables

• Earthing system

• Cleanliness: Switchgear room free of dirt and dust

Room planning

Fig. 27: Wall-standing arrangement (panels without pressure relief duct) Fig. 28: Wall-standing arrangement (panels with pressure relief duct)

Page 71: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 71

Installation

Load-bearing capacity ofthe floor

Fig. 29: Free-standing arrangement (panels with pressure relief duct)

* Rear pressure relief duct: Depth 125 mm

** Recommendation: Control aisle ≥ 1400 mm for panel replacement

*** Lateral wall distance on left or right ≥ 500 mm recommended

**** Height of switchgear room

Load data and minimum distances

Constant loads Vertical single load 8 / 14 kN ***)

Not constant loads Live load 12 kN/m2

Minimum distances Control aisle 800 mm *)

Wall distance on the left 50 mm **)

Wall distance on the right 50 mm **)

Ceiling height 2800 mm

Minimum door opening Height 2500 mm

Width 900 / 1200 mm ***)

*) Depending on national requirements; for extension/panel replacement, a control aisle of at least 1400 mm is recommended.

**) For wall-standing arrangement, a wall distance (on left or right) of at least 500 mm is recommended.

***) Depending on panel width 600 / 900 mm.

Page 72: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

72 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Construction of the floor The floor covering must be even, easy to clean, pressure-resistant, slip-resistant,

abrasion-resistant and electrically discharging.

As floor construction, the following is possible:

Steel girder position

Suitable for large and numerous floor openings, and advantageous for later modifications

or extensions of the switchgear. The frame construction should feature longitudinal and

cross girders to enable later panel replacements without problems. The dimensions

result from the constructional data of NXPLUS C (see Page 74, "Constructional data,

foundation").

Fig. 30: Frame construction with longitudinal and cross girders

Fig. 31: Frame construction with longitudinal and cross girders (cable basement)

Page 73: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 73

Installation

Reinforced-concrete plate

Suitable for small room dimensions or spans, as well as for few and smaller floor

openings.

Double floor

Suitable if neither a cable basement nor sufficient cable ducts can be installed; it

consists of removable, flame-retardant floor plates mounted on a supporting structure.

The supporting floor is about 30 to 80 cm lower depending on the cable routing (bending

radius).

Earthing system • Provide suitable earthing system for the substation building (e.g. foundation earth

electrode, ring earth electrode, earth rod), and prepare the associated connection

points inside the substation building.

• Connect components brought into the substation building - such as metallic

constructions, floor reinforcement, doors, pressure relief systems, cable tracks, etc. -

to the substation earth, and earth them.

• Dimension the cross-sections of the earth electrodes sufficiently (e.g. foundation eath

electrode, ring earth electrode, eartihing rod).

• Always observe the associated national and international standards and building

regulations.

Cable basement

The cable basement must have the following characteristics:

• Dry

• Accessible at any time

• Sufficiently illuminated

ATTENTION!

The cable basement must be sufficiently large to perform all work involved and to

provide a clear arrangement of the cables.

The height and depth of the cable basement depends on the bending radii of the

cables used.

Page 74: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

74 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

11.2 Constructional data, foundation

Floor openings and fixing points

Fig. 32: Floor openings and fixing points for 600 mm panels

1 Floor openings for control cables

2 Option: Pressure relief duct

3 Fixing hole for M 8/M 10

4 Fixing hole for M 8/M 10 (only for aseismic design)

5 Floor opening for high-voltage cables

Fig. 33: Floor openings and fixing points for 900 mm panels

1 Floor opening for control cables

3 Fixing hole for M 8/M 10

4 Fixing hole for M 8/M 10 (only for aseismic design)

5 Floor opening for high-voltage cables

Page 75: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 75

Installation

Aseismic capacity (option) NXPLUS C switchgear can be upgraded for regions at risk from earthquakes.

For aseismic fastening, the panels must be equipped with additional floor bracings. The

switchpanel and the floor bracings are bolted together with the foundation rails.

Lay the front and rear floor bracing on the base frame of the panel.

Fig. 34: Aseismic fastening

a Floor bracing

s Fixing point

Page 76: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

76 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Bolt the switchpanel and the floor bracings together with the foundation rails using

four fixing bolts size M 8 or M 10. Tightening torque: 60 Nm.

Fig. 35: Aseismic fastening for a panel width of 600 mm (view from the front)

a Floor bracing at the rear

s Floor bracing at the front

Page 77: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 77

Installation

Fig. 36: Aseismic fastening for a panel width of 900 mm (view from the rear)

a Floor bracing at the front

s Floor bracing at the rear

Page 78: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

78 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Core drillings (incl. newplug systems)

ATTENTION!

For perfect installation of the cable plugs, the following must be observed:

Observe the specifications of the cable manufacturers.

Drilling diameters depend on the cable cross-section!

Fig. 37: Core drillings - circuit-breaker (630 A, 1000 A), disconnector (1000 A), switch-disconnector, contactor, ring-main cable (630 A, 1000 A)

a 1st cable

s 2nd cable

d max. 80 mm

Page 79: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 79

Installation

Conductor distances

Make Plug type, 1st cable Distance, 1st

cable [mm]

Plug type, 2nd cable Distance, 2nd

cable [mm]

3M 93-EE- 705-6 448 93-EE 718-6 340

93-EE- 705-6 448 93-EE 705-6 275

93-EE- 715-6 448 93-EE 715-6 275

Euromold (K)400TB/G 448 (K)400TB/G 203

(K)440TB/G 448 (K)440TB/G 203

(K)430TB/G 448 (K)300PB-630 343

Südkabel (ABB) SET 12/24 448 SEHDK 13.1/23.1 338

SET 12/24 448 SET 12/24 268

SEHDT 13/23 448 SEHDT 13/23 203

nkt cables CBxx-630 448 CBxx-630 268

CBxx-630 448 CCxx-630 348

CB36-630 (1250) 448 CB36-630 (1250) 268

CB36-630 (1250) 448 CC36-630 (1250) 338

Tyco Electronics RSTI L56xx 448 RSTI -CC-L56xx 348

RSTI L58xx 448 RSTI -CC-L58xx 348

RSTI x6Lxx 448 RSTI -x6Lxx 273

Solid-insulated bar Moser-Glaser 437 Moser-Glaser ---

Preissinger 437 Preissinger ---

Ritz 437 Ritz ---

Page 80: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

80 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 38: Core drillings - circuit-breaker and disconnector (1250 A)

a 1st cable d 3rd cable

s 2nd cable f max. 80 mm

Page 81: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 81

Installation

Conductor distances

Make Plug type, 1st

cable

Distance, 1st

cable [mm]

Plug type, 2nd

cable

Distance, 2nd

cable [mm]

Plug type, 3rd

cable

Distance, 3rd

cable [mm]

3M 93-EE- 705-6 595 93-EE 718-6 485 --- ---

93-EE- 705-6 595 93-EE 705-6 425 --- ---

93-EE- 715-6 595 93-EE 715-6 425 --- ---

Euromold (K)400TB/G 595 (K)400TB/G 350 (K)400TB/G 105

(K)440TB/G 595 (K)440TB/G 350 (K)440TB/G 105

(K)430TB/G 595 (K)300PB-630 490 (K)300PB-630 385

Südkabel (ABB) SET 12/24 595 SEHDK 13.1/23.1 485 --- ---

SET 12/24 595 SET 12/24 415 --- ---

SEHDT 13/23 595 SEHDT 13/23 350 --- ---

nkt cables CBxx-630 595 CBxx-630 415 CBxx-630 235

CBxx-630 595 CCxx-630 495 CCxx-630 395

CB36-630 (1250) 595 CB36-630 (1250) 415 CB36-630 (1250) 235

CB36-630 (1250) 595 CC36-630 (1250) 485 CC36-630 (1250) 375

Tyco Electronics RSTI L56xx 595 RSTI -CC-L56xx 495 RSTI -CC-L56xx 395

RSTI L58xx 595 RSTI -CC-L58xx 495 RSTI -CC-L58xx 395

RSTI x6Lxx 595 RSTI -x6Lxx 420 RSTI -x6Lxx 245

Solid-insulated bar Moser-Glaser 584 Moser-Glaser --- Moser-Glaser ---

Preissinger 584 Preissinger --- Preissinger ---

Ritz 584 Ritz --- Ritz ---

Page 82: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

82 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 39: Core drillings - circuit-breaker and disconnector (2000 A, 2500 A)

a 1st/2nd cable d 5th/6th cable

s 3rd/4th cable f max. 80 mm

* The distance of the bushings in the vessel is 100 mm.

Page 83: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 83

Installation

Conductor distances

Floor fixing versions

Make Plug type, 1st/2nd

cable

Distance, 1st/2nd

cable [mm]

Plug type, 3rd/4th

cable

Distance, 3rd/4th

cable [mm]

Plug type, 5th/

6th cable

Distance, 5th/6th

cable [mm]

3M 93-EE- 705-6 595 93-EE 718-6 485 --- ---

93-EE- 705-6 595 93-EE 705-6 425 --- ---

93-EE- 715-6 595 93-EE 715-6 425 --- ---

Euromold (K)400TB/G 595 (K)400TB/G 350 (K)400TB/G 105

(K)440TB/G 595 (K)440TB/G 350 (K)440TB/G 105

(K)430TB/G 595 (K)300PB-630 490 (K)300PB-630 385

Südkabel (ABB) SET 12/24 595 SEHDK 13.1/23.1 485 --- ---

SET 12/24 595 SET 12/24 415 --- ---

SEHDT 13/23 595 SEHDT 13/23 350 --- ---

nkt cables CBxx-630 595 CBxx-630 415 CBxx-630 235

CBxx-630 595 CCxx-630 495 CCxx-630 395

CB36-630 (1250) 595 CB36-630 (1250) 415 CB36-630 (1250) 235

CB36-630 (1250) 595 CC36-630 (1250) 485 CC36-630 (1250) 375

Tyco Electronics RSTI L56xx 595 RSTI -CC-L56xx 495 RSTI -CC-L56xx 395

RSTI L58xx 595 RSTI -CC-L58xx 495 RSTI -CC-L58xx 395

RSTI x6Lxx 595 RSTI -x6Lxx 420 RSTI -x6Lxx 245

Solid-insulated bar Moser-Glaser 584 Moser-Glaser --- Moser-Glaser ---

Preissinger 584 Preissinger --- Preissinger ---

Ritz 584 Ritz --- Ritz ---

Fig. 40: Bolted floor fixing

a Upper edge of finished floor

s Holder for profiles (at a distance ≥ 1200 mm)

d C profile CB 50 x 30, EN 10025, S235JR

f - Hook-head screw M16x35-4.6-A3L, SN60009

- Washer R18, DIN 440/ISO 7094, S235JRG2C + L

- Hexagonal nut M16-8-A4L, DIN934/EN 4032

g Base frame of the switchgear

h min. 50 mm

j min. 90 mm

k 80 mm

l Raw floor

; Expansion dowel with hexagonal bolt and washer, FAN 12/10

A Floor finish

Page 84: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

84 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 41: Welded floor fixing

a Upper edge of finished floor

s Base frame of the switchgear

d Welding in fixing opening of base frame

f U profile U50 , DIN 1026

g Holder for profiles (at a distance ≥ 1200 mm), E50220-W0007-P005 SH4

h min. 55 mm

j min. 90 mm

k 80 mm

l Raw floor

; Expansion dowel with hexagonal bolt and washer, FAN 12/10

A Floor finish

Fig. 42: Fixing on double floor

a Upper edge of double floor

s - Hexagonal bolt M10, EN ISO 7093-152

- Washer 10,5-St-A3L , EN24014/EN24017

- Hexagonal nut M10-8-A4L, EN 4032

d Base frame of the switchgear

f Substructure

g Supporting profile (e.g. profile 70x40x2)

h Floor plate (approx. 36 mm thick)

Page 85: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 85

Installation

Fixing plate

Fig. 43: Floor fixing plate

a 60±2 mm

s 50±2 mm

d Plate 30 x 5 x 40 mm, DIN 1017/EN 10025, S235 JR, hot-dip galvanized

f 40±1 mm

g 35±2 mm

h 80±1.5 mm

j 30±1 mm

k Plate 80 x 5 x 145 (160) mm, DIN 1017/EN 10025, S235 JR, hot-dip galvanized

l 145±2 mm

; 30 mm

A 13 mm

NOTE!

The welded seams are susceptible to corrosion.

Galvanize the welded seams after welding.

Page 86: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

86 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Stipulations for evennessand straightness

Please observe the following items when preparing the foundation:

• A suitable foundation can be a false floor, a double floor or a reinforced-concrete

foundation. The reinforced-concrete floor must be equipped with foundation rails for

supporting the panels.

• As for design and construction of the foundation, the relevant standards DIN 43 661

“Fundamentschienen in Innenanlagen der Elektrotechnik” (Foundation rails in

electrical indoor installations) and DIN 18 202 “Maßtoleranzen im Hochbau” (Blatt 3)

(Measuring tolerances in structural engineering (Sheet 3)) apply.

• Dimensions of the floor opening and the fixing points of the switchgear frame (see

Page 74, "Floor openings and fixing points" and see Page 101, "Fastening the

switchgear to the foundation").

• Determine level differences between the installation surfaces of the panels using a

measuring sheet, and compensate them with shims (0.5 - 1.0 mm).

Fig. 44: Measuring sheet for the foundation. Evenness/straightness tolerance according to DIN 43661: 1 mm for 1 m length, 2 mm for the total length.

Regulations and standardsreferred to foundation and

busbar compartment

The fixed-mounted circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C for indoor installation complies

with the following prescriptions and standards:

The switchgear can be used as indoor installation according to IEC 61 936 (Power

Installations exceeding AC 1 kV) and VDE 0101

• outside lockable electrical service locations at places which are not accessible to the

public. Enclosures of switchgear can only be removed with tools

• Inside lockable electrical service locations. A lockable electrical service location is a

place outdoors or indoors that is reserved exclusively for housing electrical equipment

and which is kept under lock and key. Access is restricted to authorized personnel and

persons who have been properly instructed in electrical engineering. Untrained or

unskilled persons may only enter under the supervision of authorized personnel or

properly instructed persons

IEC/EN standard VDE standard

Switchgear 62 271-1 0670-1000

62 271-200 0671-200

Installation and earthing 61 936-1 / HD 637 -S1 0101

Environmental

conditions

60 721-3-3 DIN EN 60 721-3-3

Page 87: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 87

Installation

11.3 Transport units of NXPLUS C

Dimensions

Transport weights

Panel width Panel dimensions Width x Height x Depth [mm]

Transport inside Germany or to European countries Width x Height x Depth [mm]

Transport to overseas (seaworthy crate) Width x Height x Depth [mm]

1 x 600 600 x 2250 x 1100 3) 1100 x 2470 x 1450 1130 x 2650 x 1450

1 x 900 900 x 2250 x 1225 1450 x 2470 x 1450 1480 x 2650 x 1450

1 x 6001) 600 x 2250 x 1575 1100 x 2470 x 2100 1130 x 2650 x 2100

1 x 600 2) 600 x 2250 x 1850 1100 x 2470 x 2100 1130 x 2650 x 2100

1) Panels with top-rear single cable connection

2) Panels with top-rear double cable connection

3) Depth 1225 mm for panels with pressure relief duct

Number of panels Average transport weights depending on the extent to which the switchgear is equipped

with packing approx. kg without packing approx. kg

1 900 800

1* 1500 1400

1** 900 800

* 2000/2500 A panels ** Panels with top-rear cable connection

Page 88: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

88 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Center of gravity The center of gravity of NXPLUS C switchgear (all panels) is located at the following

position:

Fig. 45: Position of the center of gravity for 900 mm panel

a Low-voltage compartment

s Pressure relief duct

Fig. 46: Position of the center of gravity for 600 mm panel

Page 89: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 89

Installation

The center of gravity is identified with the following symbol:

Fig. 47: Symbol for the center of gravity

The symbol is adhered on both sides of the panel. Only the end wall (switchgear

termination) does not have one.

Transport regulations According to Annex A of the European agreement about international transportation of

hazardous materials on the road (ADR), Siemens SF6 gas-insulated medium-voltage

switchgear do not belong to the category of hazardous materials in respect of

transportation, and are exempted from special transport regulations according to ADR,

Clause 1.1.3.1 b).

12 Before installation

12.1 Preliminary clarifications

In order to load the transport units in a suitable installation order, the regional Siemens

representative requires the following information from you several weeks before

delivering the switchgear:

• Sketch of the installation room including the locations and numbers of the individual

switchpanels and the storage space for the accessories

• Sketch of the access route from the public road to the switchgear building and

information concerning the condition thereof (meadows, arable soil, sand, gravel, etc.)

• Sketch of the transport route inside the switchgear building with the locations and

dimensions of doors and other narrow points, as well as the floor number of the

installation room

• Information about available lifting equipment, e.g. mobile crane, fork-lift truck, lifting

truck, hydraulic jack, roller pads. If no lifting equipment is available, please notify this

explicitly

Page 90: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

90 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

12.2 Intermediate storage

If the comprehensive accessories, the delivered switchgear or parts thereof have to be

stored before installation, a suitable storage room or place has to be selected and

prepared.

Intermediate storage of the transport units:

• In original packing as far as possible

• Observe the permissible storage temperature from -25° C to +70° C in accordance

with the installed secondary devices.

• In a weatherproof place

• Protected against damage

• If packed in seaworthy crates, the switchgear can be stored for a maximum of 6

months (desiccant bags)

• Store transport units in such a way that they can be taken out later in the correct order

for installation.

DANGER!

Risk of injury and damage to the stored goods if the storage space is overloaded.

Observe the load-bearing capacity of the floor.

Do not stack the transport units.

Do not overload lighter components by stacking.

ATTENTION!

Fire risk. The transport unit is packed in flammable materials.

No smoking.

Keep fire extinguishers in a weatherproof place.

Mark the location of the fire extinguisher.

ATTENTION!

Supplied desiccant bags lose their effectiveness if they are not stored in the

undamaged original packings.

Do not damage or remove packing of desiccant bags.

Do not unpack desiccant bags before use.

Page 91: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 91

Installation

Switchgear storage inclosed rooms

As a rule, the switchgear should be stored in a closed room. The storage room must

have the following characteristics:

• Floor with adequate load-bearing capacity (weights as per delivery note)

• Even floor to enable stable storage.

• Well-ventilated and free of dust

• Dry and protected against humidity and vermin (e.g. insects, mice, rats)

• Heatable to at least 2 °C above the outside temperature in order to prevent

condensation.

• Check humidity in the packings every 4 weeks (condensation)

• Do not unpack small parts to avoid corrosion and loss.

Outdoor storage ofswitchgear packed in

seaworthy crates

If the switchgear or parts thereof are delivered in seaworthy crates, these can also be

stored up to 6 months in other rooms or outdoors. The storage place must have the

following characteristics:

• Floor with adequate load-bearing capacity (weights as per delivery note)

• Protected against humidity (rain water, flooding, melting water from snow and ice),

pollution, vermin (rats, mice, termites, etc.) and unauthorized access

• Place all crates on planks and square timber for protection against floor humidity.

• After 6 months of storage, have the desiccant agent regenerated professionally. To do

this, ask for expert personnel via your regional Siemens representative.

12.3 Tools/auxiliary means

Before starting to work on the switchgear, provide the tools/auxiliary means required:

• Hexagonal screwdriver insert (min. length 140 mm) for hexagon socket-head bolt

10 mm DIN 7422

• Torx screwdriver Tx25

• Torque wrench 20 - 50 Nm

• Ratchet, reconnectable DIN 3122

• Extension DIN 3123 40 - 125

• Socket spanner inserts DIN 3124, socket spanner inserts size 17 and 18, min. length

80 mm

• Water level

• Lifting truck

• Reinforcing bars, roller crowbars

• Transport rollers, tubes

12.4 Installation and fixing material

Before starting to install the individual components, provide for the required installation

and fixing material.

12.5 Comments on electromagnetic compatibility

To achieve appropriate electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), some basic requirements

must be observed while erecting the switchgear. This applies especially to the

installation and connection of external cables and wires.

Page 92: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

92 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Basic measures for ensuring EMC are already taken during design and assembly of the

switchgear panels. Among other things, these measures include:

• the low-voltage compartment is an integral part of the panel, which means that the

protection and control devices with the internal wiring are metal-enclosed;

• reliable earth connections of the frame parts via toothed contact washers or locking

washers;

• inside the panel, wires are laid in metal ducts;

• spatial separation of sensitive signal wires from wires with high interference voltage

levels;

• limitation of switching overvoltages of inductive loads (e.g. relay or contactor coils,

motors) by means of protective circuits with diode, varistor or RC element;

• within the LV compartment, the secondary devices are mounted in defined zones;

• shortest possible connection between corresponding modules in subracks;

• consideration of the magnetic leakage fields of conductor bars and cables;

• protection of subracks and wiring backplanes against interference by perforated

shielding plates;

• large surface bonding between all modules and devices as well as bonding to the

earthing conductor of the switchgear assembly.

These measures basically enable proper operation of the switchgear itself. The planner

or operator of the switchgear must decide whether additional measures are required

depending on the electromagnetic environment where the switchgear is installed. Such

measures must be implemented by the installation company in charge.

In an environment with heavy electromagnetic interference it may be necessary to use

shielded cables and wires for the external connections in order to avoid interferences in

the low-voltage compartment and thus, undesired influences on the electronic

protection and control or other automation devices.

Cable shields must be electrically bonded to be able to carry high frequencies, and

contacted concentrically at the cable ends.

The shields of cables and wires are connected and earthed in the low-voltage

compartment.

Connect the shields to earth potential - with high electrical conductivity and all around as

far as possible. Protect the contact surfaces from corrosion in case of humidity (regular

condensation).

When laying cables into the switchgear assembly, separate the control, signaling and

data cables and other lines with different signal and voltage levels by laying them on

separate racks or riser cable routes.

Corresponding to the different shield designs, there is a number of methods to perform

connection. The planning department or site management determines which of the

methods will be used, taking EMC requirements into account. The preceding points

should always be taken into account.

The shield is connected to cables or wires with clamps contacting all around. If low

demands are placed on EMC, it is also possible to connect the shield directly to earth

potential (combine or twist the shield wires) or via short cable connections. Use cable

lugs or wire-end ferrules at the connecting points.

Always keep the connecting leads of the shields as short as possible (< 10 cm).

If shields are used as protective earth conductors at the same time, the connected

plastic-insulated lead must be marked green/yellow over its entire length. Non-insulated

connections are inadmissible.

Page 93: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 93

Installation

13 Switchgear, unloading and erecting

13.1 Packing and transport unit

Packing The transport units can be packed as follows:

• On pallets, covered with PE protective foil

• In a seaworthy crate (switchgear is sealed with desiccant bags in PE foil)

• Other packings in special cases

Transport unit Transport units consist of:

• Individual panels, if applicable with separate low-voltage compartment

• Accessories including busbars

13.2 Completeness and transport damages

Checking for completeness Check whether the delivery is complete and correct using the delivery note and

packing lists.

Compare the serial number of the switchgear panels on the delivery note with that

on the packing and the rating plates of the panels.

Check whether the accessories are complete.

Checking for transportdamages

Temporarily open the packing in a weatherproof place to detect hidden damages.

Stick the PE foil together again and do not remove it totally until reaching the final

mounting position in order to keep the switchgear as clean as possible.

Check the ready-for-service indicator for SF6 gas (see Page 97, "Checking the ready-

for-service indicator").

Inform the forwarding agent immediately about any defects or transport damages; if

required, refuse to accept the delivery.

As far as possible, document larger defects and transport damages photographically;

prepare a damage report and inform your regional Siemens representative

immediately.

Have the transport damages repaired, otherwise you may not start installation.

Refit the packing.

NOTE!

The packing material of NXPLUS C switchgear can be disposed of as classified

materials.

Please observe the local regulations for disposal and environmental protection.

Page 94: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

94 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

13.3 Unloading transport units

Attach ropes to the hoisting tackle.

Sling the ropes around the ends of the wooden pallet.

Unload the transport units and set them down as close to the switchgear building as

possible in order to avoid unnecessary ways.

13.4 Transport to the place of installation (switchgear room)

ATTENTION!

Non-observance of the following instructions can endanger people or damage the

transport units while unloading.

Make sure that nobody is standing in the swinging area of lifted switchgear.

Attach ropes far enough on the hoisting tackle so that they cannot exert any forces

on the switchpanel walls under load.

Observe the dimensions and weights of the transport unit (delivery note).

Please ensure that the lifting and transport gear used meets the requirements as

regards construction and load-bearing capacity.

Observe the center of gravity of the transport units (see Page 47, "Complete

switchgear").

Do not climb onto the roof of the switchpanels.

If the low-voltage compartment is removed, do not step on the mounting plates of

the low-voltage compartments.

Observe the instructions on the packing.

Unload the transport units in packed condition and leave packed for as long as

possible.

Do not damage the PE protective foil.

DANGER!

Non-observance of the following instructions can endanger people or damage the

transport units during further transport.

Make sure that nobody is standing in the swinging area of lifted switchgear.

Attach ropes far enough on the hoisting tackle so that they cannot exert any forces

on the switchpanel walls under load.

Observe the dimensions and weights of the transport unit (delivery note).

Please ensure that the lifting and transport gear used meets the requirements as

regards construction and load-bearing capacity.

Observe the center of gravity of the transport units (see Page 47, "Complete

switchgear").

Do not climb onto the roof of the switchpanels.

Observe the instructions on the transport units.

Transport the transport units in packed condition and leave packed for as long as

possible.

Do not damage the PE protective foil.

Page 95: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 95

Installation

Thoroughly clean the switchgear room, since extreme cleanliness is required during

installation.

Move the transport units on their wooden pallets as far as possible.

Move the transport units to the switchgear room in the order of installation.

Move the transport units inside the building to the place of installation using a lifting

truck, fork-lift truck or rollers.

Set the transport units down in the correct sequence directly in front of the place of

installation (leave a clearance for installation).

Removing from the woodenpallets

If the panels are equipped with an interlock for the cable compartment cover, the panels

must be earthed to remove the cable compartment cover.

Remove the PE foil.

Undo the bolted joint of the cable compartment cover at the front.

Push the "locking device" lever a upwards and keep it in this position.

Lift the cable compartment cover and remove it upwards.

Identify the cable compartment cover with the panel number.

Take the transport bolts out and remove the metal plates placed underneath.

Refit the cable compartment cover to keep the panels more rigid for further

transport.

a "Feeder earthed“ locking device

Page 96: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

96 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Further transport withoutwooden pallets

Lift the transport unit by means of a crane, hydraulic jacks or a fork-lift truck (before

lifting with a fork-lift truck, knock the boards marked at the front out of the wooden

pallet).

Lower the transport unit onto roller pads (reinforced rollers), or tubes (approx. 30 mm

diameter). Distribute the roller pads so as to support the transport unit at the outer

edges and at the joints between the panels.

Lift one side, then the other side of the transport unit with roller crowbars and slowly

lower it on the mounting position. Apply the roller crowbars only at the corners of the

transport units.

Installing the transportunits

You may only start installing the transport units when

• all transport damages have been repaired

• the base frame has been levelled (1 mm/m), see DIN 43661

• the SF6 gas filling in the vessels has been checked (see Page 97, "Checking the ready-

for-service indicator").

• the accessories and the required material are complete (see Page 89, "Before

installation").

Place the first (i.e. rearmost) transport unit as exactly as possible on its final location

and place the second one close to it, keeping a small distance so that the units can

still be aligned before bolting together.

Remove packing and transport materials from the place of installation.

Remove any dirt occurred during transport, as extreme cleanliness is required during

installation.

r Now the transport units are in the correct order for assembly.

ATTENTION!

Non-observance of the following indications can damage the transport lugs. It may

occur that panels cannot be exactly aligned with a transport unit.

Maximum permissible angle of lifting equipment at the hook < 60°.

Maximum permissible angle at the panel > 60°.

Page 97: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 97

Installation

13.5 Checking the ready-for-service indicator

The panels are filled at a pressure of 1500 hPa. Before starting installation, check the

ready-for-service indicator. It is located on the left side of the control board.

Read the ready-for-service indicator.

r If the pointer is in the green area, the gas filling is in order.

If the pointer is in the red area: Check the auxiliary switch of the ready-for-service

indicator.

Checking the auxiliaryswitch of the ready-for-

service indicator

The auxiliary switch of the ready-for-service indicator can latch tight in the red area due to

extreme shocks during transport.

To put the ready-for-service indicator into operation again, the plastic part fixed at the

auxiliary switch must be brought to the initial position again by hand.

Remove the front plate of the switchgear. Push the plastic part at the auxiliary switch

downwards with the index finger until the ready-for-service indicator jumps back to

the green area. When pushing the plastic part at the auxiliary switch down from the

latched position, you must overcome a mechanical resistance.

r Then, the pointer must return to the green area automatically. If not, please stop

installation and contact the regional Siemens representative.

Fig. 48: Ready-for-service indicator

a Green

s Red

d Pointer

Page 98: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

98 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 49: 600 mm panel

Fig. 50: 900 mm panel (zoom shows view from the rear)

Fig. 51: Pointer position after operation of the plastic part at the auxiliary switch

Page 99: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 99

Installation

14 Assembling the switchgear

In the instructions given in the following sections it is assumed that a new switchgear is

being installed which has not yet been connected to the mains, and that it is therefore

not live.

14.1 Bolting panels together

Aligning panels The first panel is on its mounting position and the others are placed at a small distance.

Align the first panel laterally.

If necessary, lay shim plates under the panels to align them in vertical and horizontal

position.

Carefully approach the next panel to the one that has already been aligned.

Align the approached panel by means of the alignment brackets provided at the

vessel, and make sure that it is vertical and at the necessary height using shim

plates, if required.

Not mounting the sealingstrip in case of wall-

standing arrangement

ATTENTION!

Dirt in the switchgear can cause malfunctions during operation.

Avoid any work that could pollute the switchgear (e.g. sawing, filing, etc.).

NOTE!

For easier fitting of the panel connecting bolts, pre-assembled low-voltage

compartments should be removed before interconnecting the panels. Low-voltage

compartments on end panels may remain mounted.

Remove pre-assembled low-voltage compartments.

ATTENTION!

To take individual panels out of the switchgear assembly, please observe the following

for panels that had been provided for free-standing arrangement, but are now installed

in wall-standing arrangement:

Do not mount the sealing strip.

Page 100: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

100 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Mounting the sealing stripin case of free-standing

arrangement

To mount the sealing strip, use the Torx-screws from the pressure relief duct. Take

the other screws from the supplementary equipment.

Joining panels Bolt the panels together at the alignment brackets using 2 panel connecting bolts

M8x20 each.

Check the reference dimension K1 between the bushings (see Page 102,

"Assembling the busbars"). If necessary, insert small plates between the alignment

brackets of the panels. The plates are included in the supplementary equipment.

Remove the covers of the cable compartment and the operating mechanism.

Fig. 52: Mounting sealing strips on rear wall of switchgear

a Sealing strips

Page 101: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 101

Installation

Insert the panel connecting bolts M8x20 through the switchgear frame at the four

fixing straps of the right-side panel (view to the front of the panel) and bolt together

with the left-side panel.

Check if the panels bolted together are in vertical position.

Approach all other panels one after the other, align them and bolt the alignment

brackets and the frames together.

14.2 Fastening the switchgear to the foundation

The panels are bolted to the foundation rails.

The base pieces of the panel frames contain cutouts for fastening the switchgear.

Fasten each panel diagonally to the foundation at two points at least. Use two fixing

bolts M8 or M10 as a minimum. Tightening torque: 60 Nm.

For aseismic fastening, connect each panel diagonally to the foundation at 4 points at

least. Before doing that, lay the necessary floor bracings into the panel (see Page 74,

"Floor openings and fixing points"). To do this, use 4 fixing bolts M8 or M10.

Tightening torque: 60 Nm.

ATTENTION!

After removal, the covers of the cable compartment and the operating mechanism

must be refitted on the same panels.

After removal, identify all covers with the associated panel numbers.

Page 102: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

102 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

14.3 Assembling the busbars

Fig. 53: Busbar joint 1250 A

a Cap A Cross adapter

s Clamp S Strain washer DIN 6796-12

d Busbar D Hexagonal nut, ISO 4032-M 12, tightening torque: 50 Nm

f End adapter

g Fit component F Screw-type cone, tightening torque: 30 Nm

h Busbar insulation made of silicone rubber

j Earthing cable

k Earthing connection

l Outside cone

; Threaded bolt M 12/M 16, tightening torque: 10 Nm

K1 Standard reference dimension:

600 - 600: 600 +2 mm

600 - 900: 555 +2 mm

900 circuit-breaker panel/disconnector panel - 600: 695 +2 mm

600 bus sectionalizer - 600: 340 +2 mm

900 bus sectionalizer - 600: 295 +2 mm

900 circuit-breaker panel - 900 bus sectionalizer: 650 +2 mm

900 bus sectionalizer: 900 circuit-breaker panel/disconnector panel:

250 +2 mm

K2 Reference dimension: 79 +/–2 mm

Page 103: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 103

Installation

Fig. 54: Mounting position of clamp s with strain washer (camber upwards)

Fig. 55: Fit component g

Fig. 56: Busbar joint 1600/2000/2500 A (twin busbar)

a Cap D Cross adapter

s Clamp F Spring washer

d Coupling end adapter G Connection bolt

f Busbar, silicone-rubber insulated H Threaded bolt M 12/M 16, tightening torque: 10 Nm

g Clamp

h End adapter J Coupling cross adapter

j Fit component K Strain washer DIN 6796-12

k Earthing cable L Hexagonal nut, ISO 4032-M 12, tightening torque: 50 Nm

l Earthing connection for earthing cable

; Outside cone Screw-type cone, tightening torque: 30 Nm

A Threaded bolt M 12/M 16, tightening torque: 10 Nm

S Tinned copper washer

Page 104: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

104 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

K1 Standard reference dimension:

600 - 600: 600 +2 mm

600 - 900: 555 +2 mm

900 circuit-breaker panel/disconnector panel - 600: 695 +2 mm

600 bus sectionalizer - 600: 340 +2 mm

900 bus sectionalizer - 600: 295 +2 mm

900 circuit-breaker panel - 900 bus sectionalizer: 650 +2 mm

900 bus sectionalizer: 900 circuit-breaker panel/transformer panel: 250 +2 mm

K2 Reference dimension: 79 +/–2 mm

Fig. 57: Mounting position of clamp s with strain washer (camber upwards)

Fig. 58: Mounting position of clamp g with tinned copper washer and a spring washer

Fig. 59: Fit component j

ATTENTION!

If the electrical contact is insufficient or the push-on surfaces (high-quality joints) are

dirty, the busbars will be damaged during operation.

All busbar assembly work must be carried out with particular care. Above all, avoid

damaging the contact surfaces.

Observe extreme cleanliness.

No smoking.

Brush oxidized copper surfaces bright and grease them with mounting paste before

connection.

Observe tightening torques.

Page 105: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 105

Installation

The busbars are always delivered separately with the accessories. To simplify busbar

installation, we recommend not to mount the low-voltage compartments before the

busbars are assembled. If busbar current transformers have already been pre-assembled

(for 1250 A busbar system), these must be removed again. Current transformers in oval

design for the twin busbar system can remain mounted.

Do not unpack cross adapters, end adapters and busbars until right before assembly.

Before assembling the busbars, all frames must have been bolted together (see Page

99, "Bolting panels together").

Phase sequence

Fig. 60: Phase sequence of bushings in the busbar compartment

ATTENTION!

The mounting plate of the low-voltage compartment a can be bent under load. This

can damage the auxiliary switch of the three-position disconnector.

Do not load the mounting plate a.

If necessary, use a board with a minimum length of 1200 mm ( for 600 mm panels),

or 1800 mm length (for 900 mm panels) to distribute the load evenly.

Page 106: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

106 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 61: Phase sequence of bushings in the cable compartment

Preparing busbar elements Make sure that all busbar elements supplied are complete.

Before connection, brush oxidized copper surfaces and grease them with mounting

paste.

Clean dirty busbar elements dry with a lint-free cloth.

Screw threaded bolt M12 / M16 into the bushing with a screwdriver size 10 x 1.6

with approx. 10 Nm (hand-tight).

Check reference dimension (79 ±2 mm).

Page 107: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 107

Installation

Push-on surfaces must not get dirty during assembly. For this reason, do not grease the

surfaces until right before assembly. Avoid damages caused by the threaded bolt while

pushing on.

Grease the push-on surfaces (high-quality joints) in the adapters with mounting

paste. Use the supplied mounting paste only.

Grease the stoppers, screw-type cones and the ends of the busbar insulation with

mounting paste, too.

Remove residual mounting paste after assembly.

Assembling a busbar unit Lay the clamps onto the ends of the busbar and hold them tight.

In case of end adapters, add a fit component to obtain a symmetrical clamping.

Page 108: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

108 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Push the adapter onto the end of the busbar.

If applicable, push the current transformers onto the busbars (see Page 113,

"Installing busbar current transformers").

Proceed in the same way with the other end of the busbar.

r The busbar unit is completed.

Mounting the busbar units If applicable, push the current transformers onto the busbars (see Page 113,

"Installing busbar current transformers").

Plug the busbar unit loosely over the threaded bolts on the bushings of the first two

panels.

Insert another busbar unit in the first busbar unit.

Page 109: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 109

Installation

Press the busbar section onto the bushing.

Additional operations forassembling 2500 A busbars

(twin busbars)

A second busbar level is required to carry 2500 A. This is implemented with special

coupling cross or end adapters.

Push the tinned copper washer and the spring washer one after the other on the

threaded bolt and secure with a nut (tightening torque 50 Nm).

Clean the adapter inside and grease uniformly with mounting paste.

Screw the connection bolt onto the threaded bolt using the hexagon screwdriver

insert (tightening torque 50 Nm).

Page 110: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

110 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Screw the threaded bolt into the connection bolt as far as it will go (tightening torque

10 Nm, reference dimension: 79 mm ± 2 mm).

Clean and grease the coupling cross adapters and the busbars just as for the first

busbar level.

Just as for the first busbar level, assemble the coupling cross adapters with clamps,

and the coupling end adapters with the fit component..

Push the coupling cross adapters (incl. busbars) onto the normal adapters.

Final work (single and twin busbar system)

Letting excess air out of thescrew-type cone

Thread in the strain washers with the camber upwards and tighten the nut with 50

Nm.

ATTENTION!

The busbar insulation may be damaged! Air inclusions can cause flashovers at the

insulation.

Let excess air out of the screw-type cone with a cable strap while inserting.

Page 111: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 111

Installation

Let excess air out of the screw-type cone with a cable strap while inserting.

Tighten the screw-type cone.

Pull out the cable strap slowly.

Turn the screw-type cone back a quarter turn (to distribute the mounting paste).

Tighten the screw-type cone with 30 Nm.

Fit the cap.

Mount the earthing cables of all adapters and connect them to the vessel.

Connect all other panels and phases in the same way.

Verify that all capacitive taps are earthed.

Fit busbar support (for 31.5 kA), if applicable (see Page 112, " 31.5 kA version:

Mounting the busbar support").

Fit voltage transformers, if applicable (see Page 114, "Installing busbar voltage

transformers").

Install the low-voltage compartments and connect them with the fixing straps (see

Page 119, "Busbar covers" and see Page 122, "Installing the end walls").

Fit the busbar cover.

Page 112: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

112 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

14.4 31.5 kA version: Mounting the busbar support

Fig. 62: Busbar support 1250 A

Busbar for 1250 A

Mount the busbar supports under the following conditions:

• For a busbar length of ≥ 586 mm

Do not mount the busbar supports under the following conditions:

• For current transformer installation with a panel width of 600 mm

Fig. 63: Busbar support for 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A

Busbar for 1600 A, 2000 A, 2500 A:

Mount the busbar support in all 31.5 kA panels:

• Mount the busbar support at the upper busbar level according to the enclosed

installation instructions

Page 113: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 113

Installation

Under the following conditions it is not possible/necessary to mount any busbar

supports:

• In bus sectionalizer panels

• In right end panels

• In panels with busbar current transformers

14.5 Installing busbar current transformers

The mounting plates for the current transformers are fitted.

Fig. 64: Current transformer mounting plates

Push on the current transformers before mounting the busbar units. While doing

this, observe the direction of side P1.

Current transformers ontwin busbars

The current transformers are mounted on the twin busbars after having mounted the

busbar units on the vessels.

Mount the current transformer mounting plates on the current transformers.

Push the current transformers with the mounting plates over the busbar units and

mount them on the vessel. When pushing the current transformers on, observe the

direction of side P1.

Mount a supporting plate to stabilize the current transformers.

Fig. 65: Current transformers on twin busbar

a Current transformer

s Current transformer mounting plate

d Supporting plate

Page 114: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

114 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

14.6 Installing busbar voltage transformers

The voltage transformers are delivered separately. For installation, the busbars must be

mounted and accessible from the front, i.e. the low-voltage compartments must not

have been mounted yet or must be removed.

Fig. 66: Busbar voltage transformer

ATTENTION!

When the voltage transformer is mounted on the busbar, caps and screw-type cones

are not mounted.

During first installation, do not mount the caps and the screw-type cone, but lay

them in the storage box. Perform all other operations exactly as described in the

installation instructions (see Page 102, "Assembling the busbars").

If the busbar assembly has already been completed, remove caps and the screw-

type cone.

Page 115: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 115

Installation

Fig. 67: Mounted busbar voltage transformer - sectional view from the front

a Voltage transformers

s Cast-resin cone connected with voltage transformer, tightening torque 30 Nm

d Threaded bolt with hexagon socket, tightening torque: 10 Nm

f Hexagonal nut, tightening torque: 50 Nm

g Threaded bolt M12 / M16, tightening torque: 10 Nm

h Fixing bolts M8 for voltage transformer

ATTENTION!

The busbar insulation may be damaged! Air inclusions can cause flashovers at the

insulation.

While installing the voltage transformer, let excess air out of the adapter with a

cable strap.

ATTENTION!

While mounting metal-coated voltage transformers, the coating may be scratched or

damaged. Then, the voltage transformers cannot be touched anymore.

Work carefully while mounting metal-coated voltage transformers.

Take care not to scratch or damage the metal coating.

Page 116: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

116 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Grease components with mounting paste before installation.

Replace screw-type cone by adapter (observe enclosed installation instructions).

Tighten the adapter with 30 Nm.

Align the voltage transformer support with the protrusion to the left.

Mount the voltage transformer support on the vessel.

While installing the voltage transformer, let excess air out of the adapter with a cable

strap.

Mount the voltage transformers consecutively. Tightening torque: 20 Nm.

Establish secondary connections to the low-voltage compartment with a plug

connector.

Connect the earthing cable of the adapter.

NOTE!

To remove a defective voltage transformer from the busbar and cover the busbar

subsequently in a surge-proof way, observe the following operations:

Store the screw-type cones left over during installation (3 nos.) in the storage box

located at the voltage transformer support.

Keep the residual mounting paste (tube) in the storage box as well.

Store a cable strap in the storage box.

Fig. 68: Storage box at the voltage transformer support

a Storage box

ATTENTION!

After removal of the voltage transformers, cover the busbars again in a surge-proof way.

To do this, always keep the cap and the screw-type cone in the storage box a.

Page 117: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 117

Installation

Checking the voltagetransformer connection

On one panel of the switchgear, switch the circuit-breaker and the three-position

switch to CLOSED position.

Connect a voltmeter to the outgoing cable of the voltage transformer and set the

mV-range.

Apply 15 to 20 V DC to L1, L2, L3 to earth with the battery and observe the

voltmeter.

r If the pointer moves a little bit, the voltage transformer connection is in good order.

14.7 Installing the earthing busbar

Fig. 69: Circuit diagram for checking the voltage transformer connection

a Voltage transformer

s Plug connector

d Busbar

f Three-position switch

g Circuit-breaker

h Battery box (15 – 20 V)

Fig. 70: Earth connections

a Earthing connection

s Link

Page 118: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

118 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Detach the pre-assembled link provided at the joint and push it through the opening

of the side wall of the supporting frame.

Brush oxidized copper surfaces and apply a thin film of mounting paste.

Bolt the link together with the adjacent unit of the earthing busbar using an M 10

bolt. Tightening torque: 50 Nm.

Proceed in the same way with the other joints.

14.8 Switchgear earthing

The cross-sections and materials of the earthing conductors are specified in the DIN/

VDE 0141 standard or in the relevant country-specific standards.

Connect the earthing busbar of the two end panels - at least - (bolt M 12) to the

substation earth. In addition, earth approximately every fifth panel.

Lay the earthing cable through the right-hand wiring duct into the cable basement.

Example for an earthing with a 95 mm2 cable

Page 119: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 119

Installation

14.9 Low-voltage compartments, installation

Put the low-voltage compartment on the frame of the associated switchpanel and

push it back until the retaining hooks (2 nos.) slip into the opening and the front of

the low-voltage compartment is flush with the panel front.

Bolt the low-voltage compartment to the frame at the front lower edge with two M 8

bolts.

Repeat the same operations for the other low-voltage compartments.

Bolt the low-voltage compartments together up at the side edges with one thread-

ridging screw size M 5 each.

Thread the pre-assembled cables of the three-position switch and the circuit-breaker

through the right-side opening at the bottom.

Plug the 10-pole connectors onto the corresponding terminals according to the

circuit diagram.

Lay the bus wires in the ducts and plug them on the corresponding terminals

according to the circuit diagram.

Wire the current transformer and voltage transformer leads to the corresponding

terminals according to the circuit diagram.

14.10 Busbar covers

For a panel width of 600 mm: Mount the busbar covers and bolt them tight with 8

thread-ridging screws M 5.

Fig. 71: Bolting busbar covers tight with a panel width of 600 mm

Page 120: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

120 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

For a panel width of 900 mm: Mount the busbar covers and bolt them tight with 10

thread-ridging screws size M 5 and 5 nuts size M8.

Mounting metal spoilers

Fig. 72: Bolting busbar covers tight with a panel width of 900 mm

a 10 x thread-ridging screw M5

s 5 x nut M8

DANGER!

To guarantee the internal arc classification, panels with a width of 900 mm have to be

equipped with metal spoilers.

It is absolutely necessary to mount metal spoilers in order to avoid personal injuries

and switchgear damages.

Take two metal spoilers from the supplementary equiment.

Page 121: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 121

Installation

Mount the metal spoilers with the existing bolts from the busbar cover and the low-

voltage comparrment.

In end panels, mount an intermediate plate between the two metal spoilers on the

termination side.

Mount the metal spoiler on the right end panel in analogy to the metal spoiler on the

left end panel.

Fig. 73: Metal spoilers mounted on an intermediate panel with a width of 900 mm

a Rear metal spoiler

s Busbar cover

d Front metal spoiler

f Low-voltage compartment

Fig. 74: Metal spoiler mounted on left end panel with a width of 900 mm

a Rear metal spoiler

s Intermediate plate, left side

d Front metal spoiler

f Low-voltage compartment

Page 122: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

122 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

14.11 Installing the end walls

Bolt the end wall together with the front and rear edge of the end panel using 12

thread-ridging screws size M 5 each.

Mount the termination angle at the upper edge of the panel.

In panels without pressure relief duct, press the end cover firmly to the wall and

tighten the bolts. If applicable, fasten to the wall.

NOTE!

If not ordered otherwise by the customer, the end panel of the NXPLUS C switchgear is

delivered with mounted end walls and mounted termination angle.

In this case, the following work operations do not have to be observed.

Page 123: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 123

Installation

14.12 Extension with individual panels

Do always observe the Five Safety Rules if you are going to extend an existing

switchgear assembly or replace components.

Remove end wall.

Remove the low-voltage compartment, the busbar cover and, if required, the current

or voltage transformers of the last panel and the one before last.

Approach the extension panel, align it and bolt it together (see Page 99, "Bolting

panels together").

Fasten the extension panel to the foundation (see Page 101, "Fastening the

switchgear to the foundation").

On the last two panels, remove the cap and the screw-type cone of the busbar.

Undo the M12 nut and take it out.

Remove the strain washer (do not use it again).

Further installation as described starting from: (see Page 102, "Assembling the

busbars").

Replace the end adapters of the former end panel by cross adapters.

Grease new components with mounting paste.

Do not forget to let excess air out see Page 110, "Final work (single and twin busbar

system)".

DANGER!

High voltage! Danger!

Isolate the switchgear.

Secure against reclosing.

Verify safe isolation from supply.

Earth and short-circuit.

Cover or barrier adjacent live parts.

Page 124: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

124 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

15 Electrical connections

In the instructions given in the following sections it is assumed that a new switchgear is

being installed which has not yet been connected to the mains, and that it is therefore

not live. If you are going to extend an existing switchgear assembly or replace

components, please observe the Five Safety Rules.

15.1 Connecting cable T-plugs

For NXPLUS C switchgear, basically only cable T-plugs shielded by means of an external

semi-conductive layer may be used. The suitable cable plugs for outside-cone bushings

of interface type C according to EN 50181 are listed in the section "Description" ( see

Page 27, "Cable connection" NXPLUS C ).

Please select the tightening torque of the bolted joint "cable-T-plug - bushing" according

to the specifications of the respective cable T-plug manufacturer.

If there are no specifications from the cable T-plug manufacturer's side, please tighten

the bolted joint with 50 Nm.

Phase sequence

Fig. 75: Phase sequence of bushings in the cable compartment

Preparations Earth the feeder.

Undo the fixing bolts of the cable compartment cover.

Lift the cable compartment cover and remove it to the front.

DANGER!

High voltage! Danger!

Isolate the switchgear.

Secure against reclosing.

Verify safe isolation from supply.

Earth and short-circuit.

Cover or barrier adjacent live parts.

Page 125: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 125

Installation

Mounting cable T-plugs oncable ends

Fit the cable T-plugs on the cable ends according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Mounting cable T-plugs After installation of the cable T-plugs in the phases L1 to L3, one air guide each must be

mounted in the cable compartment. The air guides are fitted on the mounting plate

below the operating mechanism box. Tightening torque for the air guides: 20 Nm.

ATTENTION!

Surfaces of high-quality joints can easily be damaged by incorrect handling.

Observe extreme cleanliness.

ATTENTION!

Cable plugs can easily be damaged by incorrect handling.

Make sure that the cable T-plugs are mounted on the cable ends by instructed

personnel.

Make sure that mounted cable plugs are not bended or twisted.

NOTE!

The air guides in the cable compartment have been pre-assembled at the factory. For

cable installation, the air guides must be removed.

After cable installation, position the air guides as close as possible to the front in

accordance with the cable T-plugs used.

Do not exceed the distance of 10 mm to the cable T-plugs.

After installation, the air guides must not touch the cable T-plugs.

While installing the air guides, take care not to damage the cable T-plugs.

Page 126: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

126 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

In panels with HV HRC fuses, no air guides must be mounted in the cable compartment.

Mount the cable T-plugs of the phases L1 to L3 one after the other.

In the cable compartment, fit the air guide on the mounting plate. Tightening

torque: 20 Nm.

Aligning and mounting thecable bracket

The cable bracket can be mounted in the cable compartment at two different heights:

• Upper position: For panels with cable-type current transformers at the panel

connection.

• Lower position: For panels without cable-type current transformers at the panel

connection.

Align the cable bracket and bolt it tight.

Mount the cable clamps. To do this, use cable clamps made of non-magnetizable

materials (plastic, aluminum) to fasten the high-voltage cables at the cable bracket of

NXPLUS C, e.g. plastic clamps make id-Technik (cable clamp K26/38, cable clamp

K36-52 mm).

Fig. 76: Air guides at the cable connection: One cable per phase

a Mounting plate

s Cable T-plug

d Air guide

f Fastening at the switchgear vessel

g Switchgear vessel

Page 127: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 127

Installation

Connect the cable shield and the earthing of the plug housing to the cable bracket.

Option: Mount insulated earthing bar on cable bracket.

Hang the cable compartment cover in and screw the four fixing bolts in again.

ATTENTION!

To guarantee safe earthing of the cable compartment cover, observe the following:

Do always use the self-tapping screws supplied to fasten the cable compartment

cover.

Page 128: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

128 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Bolt the cable compartment cover tight at the lower edge using four self-tapping

screws size M5 . Tightening torque: 7 Nm.

Connecting two or threecables per phase

Up to 3 cables (plugs) can be connected per phase for 600-mm-wide panels.

After each three-phase cable connection, another air guide must be mounted in the

cable compartment.

Fig. 77: Earthing the cable compartment cover with self-tapping screws

a Cutting ring

NOTE!

The air guides in the cable compartment have been pre-assembled at the factory. For

cable installation, the air guides must be removed.

After cable installation, position the air guides as close as possible to the front in

accordance with the cable T-plugs used.

Do not exceed the distance of 10 mm to the cable T-plugs.

After installation, the air guides must not touch the cable T-plugs.

While installing the air guides, take care not to damage the cable T-plugs.

Page 129: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 129

Installation

Mount first set of cable T-plugs on phases L1 to L3.

Pre-assemble the coach bolts on the fist air guide. To do this, turn the fixing nut so

far that the bolt heads can still be fitted into the mounting plate later.

Hang the air guide into the mounting plate and push into the correct position.

Mount second set of cable T-plugs on phases L1 to L3.

Pre-assemble the coach bolts on the second air guide. To do this, turn the fixing nut

so far that the bolt heads can still be fitted into the mounting plate later.

Hang the air guide into the mounting plate and push into the correct position.

Tighten the fixing nuts of the air guide. Tightening torque: 20 Nm.

Mount third set of cable T-plugs on phases L1 to L3.

Mount the third air guide in the same way as the second one.

15.2 Panels 2000 A, 2500 A with double connections

In 2000 A, 2500 A panels with double connections, each of the 6 connections may be

equipped with the same number of cables only. 2, 4 or 6 cables can be connected per

phase.

Fig. 79: Double connections with identification of the phase sequence

Ensure symmetrical current distribution per phase.

Fig. 78: Air guides at the cable connection: Three cables per phase

a Fastening at the partition to the operating mechanism compartment

s Cable T-plug

d Air guide

f Switchgear vessel

Page 130: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

130 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Mounting air guides in thecable compartment

The air guides in 2000 A, 2500 A panels are fitted on the mounting plate provided for this

purpose at the bottom of the switchgear vessel.

The following operations apply to the cable compartment.

Mount first set of cable T-plugs on phases L1 to L3.

Pre-assemble the coach bolts on the second air guide. To do this, turn the fixing nut

so far that the bolt heads can still be fitted into the mounting plate later.

Hang the air guide into the mounting plate and mount it according to the given

recommendation (see Page 124, "Connecting cable T-plugs").

Tighten the fixing nuts of the air guide. Tightening torque: 20 Nm.

Mount second and third set of cable T-plugs on phases L1 to L3.

Mount second and third air guide in the same way as the first one.

Fig. 80: Air guides in the cable compartment of 2000 A, 2500 A panels

a First air guide

s Second air guide

d Third air guide

Page 131: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 131

Installation

15.3 Connecting surge arresters

Suitable surge arresters are listed in the operating instructions (see Page 27, "Possible

combinations of cable connection types (T-plugs, coupling inserts) and surge arresters in

NXPLUS C up to 24 kV").

The surge arresters are supplied with the supplementary equipment. Depending on their

version, they are equipped with a support.

If a power-frequency voltage test is planned at site after installation, (see Page 155,

"Performing the power- frequency voltage test"), do not fit the surge arresters yet.

Mount the surge arresters according to the manufacturer's instructions.

15.4 Surge limiters, connection

You can only connect the surge limiter 3EH5 ... -5BA0 of Siemens (rated voltage

Ur=3.6 kV / 4.8 kV / 7.2 kV).

For connection at the cable connection, the following options are possible:

• Euromold

- Use of the cable T-plug 300PB-630A-U-BEGRENZ for connecting the surge limiter.

• nkt cables

- Use of the cable T-plug CC 12-630, CC 17,5-630 or CC 24-630 in combination with the

assembly kit 26 500 33 for connecting the surge limiter.

• Tyco Electronics Raychem

- Use of the cable T-plug SMOE 63862 for connecting the surge limiter.

Mount the surge limiters and the outside-cone plugs according to the manufacturer's

instructions.

Page 132: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

132 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

15.5 Connecting auxiliary circuits

The circuit-breaker switchgear NXPLUS C is delivered with operating and control

equipment as ordered.

The operating and control equipment as well as the terminals in the switchgear are

identified in the same way as in the associated circuit diagrams.

If the low-voltage compartment is installed later, the connections of the auxiliary circuits

are completed on site.

Fig. 81: Auxiliary circuits in the 600 mm low-voltage compartment

Fig. 82: Auxiliary circuits in the 900 mm low-voltage compartment

Page 133: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 133

Installation

Lay, fix and connect the external cables in accordance with the national standards and

specifications (conductor, shielding, earthing).

Fig. 83: Open the right-hand leaf of the 900 mm low-voltage compartment door (open the left-hand leaf and undo two bolts on the right-hand leaf)

There are wiring ducts on the right and on the left inside the cable compartment. The

left-hand duct is left empty at the factory and can be used for external cables. The right-

hand duct contains the internal panel wiring provided at the factory.

Lay the external cables in the left-hand wiring duct and fix them with cable straps.

Page 134: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

134 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Laying the current and voltage transformer leads for the capacitive voltage detecting system inthe right-hand wiring duct

Lay current and voltage transformer leads with excessive length in meanders.

Fig. 84: Current and voltage transformer leads laid in meanders in the right-hand wiring duct

a Current transformer lead

s Voltage transformer lead

d Wire for capacitive voltage detecting system

Page 135: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 135

Installation

Lay wire groups keeping the maximum possible distance between them and tight on the earthed

plate.

Fig. 85: Wire groups laid in the right-hand wiring duct keeping the maximum possible distance between them

a Current transformer lead

s Voltage transformer lead

d Wire for capacitive voltage detecting system

f Lay wire groups keeping the maximum possible distance between them

Page 136: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

136 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Laying secondary customer cables in the left-hand wiring duct

Lay current and voltage transformer leads with excessive length in meanders.

Cross the cables at a right angle.

Fig. 86: Customer cables laid in meanders in the left-hand wiring duct

a Customer cable

s Wire for capacitive voltage detecting system (option)

Page 137: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 137

Installation

The bus wires and the cables for the circuit-breaker and the three-position switch are

pluggable. The terminals are arranged in the low-voltage compartment.

Lay the cables for the three-position switch and, if required, for the current and

voltage transformers in the low-voltage compartment.

Plug pre-assembled bus wires onto the bus wire terminals. Observe the coding of

the 10-pole plugs.

Plug the cables for the circuit-breaker and the three-position switch on the

associated terminals.

If required, connect the current and voltage transformer leads.

Lay wire groups keeping the maximum possible distance between them and tight on the

earthed plate.

For EMC-compatible laying, the cables have been divided into functional groups: e.g. group 1

(signal wires), group 2 (control wires), etc.

Fig. 87: Wire groups laid in the right-hand wiring duct keeping the maximum possible distance between them

a Customer cable

s Group 1

d Group 2

f Lay wire groups keeping the maximum possible distance between them

Page 138: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

138 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

16 Installation of degree of protection versions IP31D, IP32D and

IP34D

16.1 IP31D - protection against vertically falling water drops

Mounting the protection against vertically falling water drops

Stick sealing strap on rear side of angle plate.

ATTENTION!

To be able to mount the protection against vertically falling water drops, observe the

following:

The switchgear end walls and the busbar cover must be assembled.

Fig. 88: Setup of a protection against vertically falling water drops (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the front

a Connecting plate

s Sealing strap for connecting plates

d Top plate

f Angle plate

Page 139: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 139

Installation

While sticking, take care that the sealing strap is in line with the angle plate on the

left and on the right.

Mount the angle plate on the low-voltage compartment using four thread-ridging

screws M5x16.

Fig. 89: Mounting the sealing strap on the angle plate (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the rear

a Angle plate

s Sealing strap

Fig. 90: Mounting the angle plate (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the front

Page 140: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

140 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Align and fasten the top plate on the low-voltage compartment.

Stick sealing strap on connecting plates.

Bolt the connecting plates together with the top plates and the angle plates

respectively on the left and on the right. To do this, use four thread-ridging screws

M5x16.

Fig. 91: Bolting the top plate tight (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the rear

Fig. 92: Bolting the connecting plates tight (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the rear

Page 141: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 141

Installation

Mounting the protection against vertically falling water drops on the end panel

Fig. 93: Completed protection against vertically falling water drops (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the front

ATTENTION!

In the end panels (left or right side), mount the angle plate underneath the termination

angle.

If the termination angle has been pre-assembled, remove it.

Fig. 94: Protection against vertically falling water drops on the left-end panel (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the front

a Connecting plate

s Sealing strap for connecting plate

d Angle plate

f Mounted top plate

g Low-voltage compartment

h Termination angle

j Busbar cover

k Top plate

l Sealing strap for left end plate

; Left end plate

Page 142: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

142 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Mounting the protection against vertically falling water drops on a high low-voltage compartment

If the high low-voltage compartments are already pre-assembled, the operations to

be performed are the same as those for installation of the protection against

vertically falling water drops on small low-voltage compartments.

If the low-voltage compartments are not pre-assembled, provide sealing straps at the

following positions:

• Between the individual panels.

• On the rear wall of the low-voltage compartment, in line with the busbar cover.

ATTENTION!

Please observe the following instructions to mount the protection against vertically

falling water drops on a high low-voltage compartment if the low-voltage compartments

are not pre-assembled:

Stick a sealing strap in line with the upper edge of the busbar cover and on the rear

wall of the low-voltage compartment.

Stick a sealing strap between the panels on the rear wall of the low-voltage

compartment, in line with the partition plate.

Fig. 95: Protection against vertically falling water drops on the left-end panel (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with high low-voltage compartment) - view from the rear

a Connecting plate

s Sealing strap for connecting plate

d Left end plate

f Sealing strap for left end plate

g Top plate

h Angle plate

Page 143: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 143

Installation

Mounting the protection against vertically falling water drops on panels with a width of 900 mm

The operations correspond to those of the installation of the protection against

vertically falling water drops of the 600 mm panel.

As a difference to panels with a width of 600 mm, the angle plate is bolted together

with the spoiler plate and the busbar cover. To do this, use three bolts M5x10 each.

Fig. 96: Sticking sealing straps on high low-voltage compartments (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with high low-voltage compartment) - view from the rear

a Sealing straps between the panels

s Sealing straps on the rear wall of the low-voltage compartment

Fig. 97: Protection against vertically falling water drops (example: switchgear version with a panel width of 900 mm with mounted metal spoilers) - view from the front

a Connecting plates

s Top plate

d Sealing strap for connecting plates

f Angle plate

g Spoiler plate

Page 144: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

144 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

16.2 IP32D - protection against vertically falling water drops when the switchgear is inclined by 15°

The operations correspond to those of the installation of the protection against

vertically falling water drops IP31D.

ATTENTION!

If the switchgear is inclined by 15°, an edge protection provides personal safety and

prevents the ingress of vertically falling water drops in the switchgear.

Use top plates with edge protection.

Fig. 98: Top plates with edge protection (example: 31.5 kA switchgear version with small low-voltage compartment) - view from the front

a Connecting plates

s Sealing strap for connecting plates

d Top plate

f Edge protection

g Angle plate

Page 145: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 145

Installation

Fig. 99: Edge protection when the switchgear is inclined by 15°

f Edge protection 150 mm

Page 146: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

146 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

16.3 IP34D - protection against splashing water from any direction

The operations correspond to those of the installation of the protection against

vertically falling water drops IP31D.

ATTENTION!

Before mounting the top plates on end panels, insert a sealing angle to protect the

switchgear against splashing water from any direction.

Mount the sealing angle on the low-voltage compartment using two self-tapping

screws M5x12.

Fig. 100: Mounting the sealing angle (example: right end panel) - view from the front

a Connecting plate

s Top plate

d Right end plate

f Sealing strap for right end plate

g Sealing angle, right side

h Low-voltage compartment

j Angle plate

k Sealing strap for connecting plate

Page 147: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 147

Installation

17 Commissioning

17.1 Final work

Rating plate / type plate Check the data on the rating plate and the auxiliary voltage of the control and end

devices as against the requirements.

Ready-for-service indicator,checking

Check ready-for-service indicator (see Page 97, "Checking the ready-for-service

indicator").

Checking switchgear fixing Check switchgear fixing.

Checking bolted joints Check the earthing connections.

Check the bolted joints of the low-voltage equipment at random.

Check all parts of the switchgear that have been disassembled and assembled again

at site during installation or that have been installed subsequently, in order to verify

correct assembly and completeness.

Closing the circuit-breakerfront cover

Hang the front cover in.

DANGER!

High voltage! Danger!

Isolate the switchgear.

Secure against reclosing.

Verify safe isolation from supply.

Earth and short-circuit.

Cover or barrier adjacent live parts.

DANGER!

Mechanical components may move quickly, even remotely controlled.

Do not remove covers.

Do not reach into openings.

ATTENTION!

Earthing of the front cover is only guaranteed if the cover is bolted together with the

switchgear frame. Do always use the self-tapping screws supplied to achieve a safe

earthing of the front cover.

Before commissioning, bolt the front cover together with the switchgear frame.

Page 148: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

148 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Bolt the front cover tight at the lower edge using two self-tapping screws size M 5.

Tightening torque: 7 Nm. Tightening torque: 7 Nm.

Closing the cablecomparment cover

Hang the cable compartment cover in.

Fig. 101: Earthing the front cover with self-tapping screws

a Cutting ring

ATTENTION!

Earthing of the cable compartment cover is only guaranteed if the cover is bolted

together with the switchgear frame. Do always use the self-tapping screws supplied to

achieve a safe earthing of the cable compartment cover.

Before commissioning, bolt the cable compartment cover together with the

switchgear frame.

Page 149: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 149

Installation

Bolt the cable compartment cover tight at the lower edge using four self-tapping

screws size M 5 . Tightening torque: 7 Nm.

Checking auxiliary cableconnections

Check correct wiring according to the circuit diagrams.

Check clamping and plug-in connections at random (perfect contact, labels, etc.).

Checking high-voltageconnections

Check earthing of cable terminations on all connected high-voltage cables.

If required, test cables (see Page 231, "Cable testing").

Feeder without cables Switch the switching device to EARTHED position and lock it, or cover the bushings

with surge-proof caps (e.g. Euromold, NKT, etc.).

Tyding up and visualinspection

Remove any attached instruction labels and documents that are not required

anymore for operation.

Remove any tools, materials etc. that are not required anymore from the area of

switchgear.

Remove any dirt from the area of the switchgear (cleaning agent ARAL 4005 or

HAKU 1025 and lint-free rag/brush).

Fit all covers.

Put the caps on the test sockets of the capacitive voltage detecting systems.

Touch up scratches and impacts in the surface painting. Available kit: Touch-up set

(spatula and paint) and paint pen.

Fig. 102: Earthing the cable compartment cover with self-tapping screws

a Cutting ring

Page 150: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

150 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

17.2 Checking the accessories

Make sure that the following accessories are ready to hand:

• Operating instructions

• One operating lever for the three-position disconnector for the DISCONNECTING

function with black ball handles, and one operating lever for the EARTHING/

READY-TO-EARTH function with red ball handles.

Operating lever for three-position disconnector, only for switchgear with a panel width of 600 m

Fig. 103: Operating lever for DISCONNECTING function

Fig. 104: Operating lever for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function

Operating lever for three-position disconnector for switchgear with panel widths of 600 and 900 mm

Fig. 105: Operating lever for DISCONNECTING function Fig. 106: Operating lever for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function

Page 151: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 151

Installation

• Hand crank for charging the circuit-breaker closing spring (with freewheel)

• Adapter for emergency operation (to be used only with a panel width of 900 mm

and motor operating mechanism)

• Double-bit keys with a diameter of 3 mm/5 mm

• Circuit diagrams

• Torx screwdriver T25

Identification on the operating levers for switchgear with panel widths of 600 and 900

mm

Type of

operating

mechanism

Spring-operated mechansim /

spring-operated/stored-energy

mechanism

Slow motion mechanism

Symbols

600 mm panel width 900 mm panel width

Turn operating lever by 90°. Turn operating lever by 180°.

Fig. 107: Double-bit key with a diameter of 3 mm (door of low-voltage compartment)

Fig. 108: Double-bit key with a diameter of 5 mm (voltage transformer disconnector and door of low-voltage compartment)

Page 152: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

152 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

17.3 Instructing operating personnel

Instruct operating personnel in theory and practice of switchgear operation.

17.4 Function test / Test operation

Mechanical function test Switch the three-position switch and the circuit-breaker several times to CLOSED

and OPEN position, observing the correct indication of the associated position

indicators.

Test fuse tripping with test fuse.

Check HV HRC fuse-links.

Check mechanical interlocks and covers for easy operation.

Emergency release of thesolenoid interlocking

If the switchgear is equipped with a solenoid interlocking, the control gate is blocked if

there is no auxiliary voltage available. In case of emergency, this interlock can be

bypassed as follows:

DANGER!

Putting defective switchgear into operation can endanger the life of people and damage

the switchgear.

Never put switchgear into operation if you notice during test operation that a part of

it does not work as described in here.

Perform test operations with auxiliary voltage only!

DANGER!

Risk of injury by sudden rotation of hand crank. If you use a hand crank without a

freewheel to charge the spring, the hand crank will rotate when the control voltage is

switched on again (motor starts up) and can lead to injury.

Use special hand crank with freewheel from the accessories!.

DANGER!

If the interlocking provided by the control gate is eliminated, switching operations are

possible that can cause an arc fault which will endanger the life of the people present

and damage the switchgear.

Do only eliminate the interlocking of the control gate to push the control gate to the

center position.

Do not perform switching operations.

Use a screwdriver that fits the hole diameter of the solenoid openings.

Page 153: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 153

Installation

To push the control gate from center position to right position: Remove left-

hand dummy plug a. Insert the screwdriver through the left-hand opening and push

the solenoid back. Push the control gate to the right. The left-hand solenoid is

released again, blocking further movements.

To push the control gate from center position to left position: Remove right-

hand dummy plug s. Insert the screwdriver through the right-hand opening and

push the solenoid back. Push the control gate to the left. The right-hand solenoid is

released again, blocking further movements.

To push the control gate from the right or left position to the center position

again: Remove the stopper (according to the position of the control gate), and push

the solenoid back with the screwdriver. Push the control gate to the center position.

The solenoid is released again, blocking further movements.

After work completion, pull the screwdriver out and refit the stopper.

Activating undervoltagerelease

The undervoltage releases mounted in the circuit-breaker must be activated.

The circuit-breaker operating mechanism is located in the central part of the panel

behind the ON/OFF pushbuttons.

Remove the circuit-breaker front cover.

Shift the retaining screw of the striker from position A to position B.

Close the operating mechanism box and refit the cover.

r The circuit-breaker operating mechanism is now ready for operation with

undervoltage release.

Page 154: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

154 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Electrical function test Test operation helps you to verify the perfect operation of the switchgear without high

voltage before commissioning.

Switch on all auxiliary and control voltages and verify correct polarity.

r The motor of the circuit-breaker operating mechanism starts up and charges the

closing spring.

Test panels with electromagnetically interlocked three-position switch only with

applied auxiliary voltage.

Check whether the mechanical and/or electrical interlocking conditions are fulfilled

without using excessive force.

Check whether the switch positions of the three-position switches are displayed

correctly.

Switch the three-position switch and the circuit-breaker several times to CLOSED

and OPEN position at the panel and from remote. At the same time, check whether

the switch positions are displayed correctly at the panel and, if applicable, in the

control room, and if the auxiliary switches and position switches operate correctly.

After operating the three-position switch, check whether the operating levers can be

pushed onto the operating shafts. If not, the motor may have jumped over due to

reverse polarity. Inform the regional Siemens representative.

Check the function of the closing solenoid by electrical operation.

Check the function of the shunt releases, c.t.-operated releases and undervoltage

releases by electrical operation.

Faults during test operation • The three-position disconnector does not move to the desired position during the first

electrical operation. (Example: The three-position disconnector moves to the

"EARTHING CLOSED" position instead of the "DISCONNECTOR CLOSED" position)

• The control system of the three-position disconnector has detected the incorrect

execution of the command and is in faulty mode. In this condition, no further switching

operations are possible.

Fault clearing Check the polarity of the auxiliary voltage and the motor connection.

Switch the operating mechanism manually back to the basic position.

Reset the control system of the three-position disconnector by switching the

auxiliary voltage off and then on again.

r The position indicator for the DISCONNECTING and EARTHING functions shows

OPEN (see Page 163, "Three-position switch operation" ).

r The three-position disconnector can be put into operation again.

Perform test operation of the three-position disconnector.

Switching the three-position disconnector to the basic position (the

illustrations show a front cover for a panel width of 900 mm)

ATTENTION!

Before test operation, make sure that the three-position diconnector is switched to the

basic position, i.e., the position indicators show the OPEN position for the

DISCONNECTING and EARTHING functions.

Do absolutely switch the three-position disconnector to the basic position by hand.

Page 155: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 155

Installation

If there are any faults that cannot be cleared at site:

Do not put the switchgear into operation.

Inform the regional Siemens representative.

Completing test operation Switch all switching devices to OPEN position.

17.5 Performing the power- frequency voltage test

If required, a test with rated short-duration power-frequency withstand voltage can be

performed on site. The busbar voltage transformers are designed for a repeat test at

80% UD and 50 Hz according to IEC 62271-200.

Preparing the power-frequency voltage test

Switch the circuit-breaker and the three-position switch of the incoming feeder to

CLOSED position to perform the power-frequency voltage test.

Switch all other three-position switches to EARTHED position.

Earth the feeder voltage transformers through the voltage transformer disconnector.

If applicable, remove the surge arresters from the busbar and the incoming feeder.

Protect the coupling units of the surge arresters in a surge-proof way using suitable

sealing caps.

Apply the power-frequency test voltage in a surge-proof way at the cable connection

bushing via test adapters.

r Now you can carry out the test.

Initial position Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector from EARTHED to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise in panels with a width of 600 mm , and 180° counter-clockwise in panels with a width of 900 mm)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 156: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Installation

156 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Performing the power-frequency voltage test

Earth adjacent phases.

Test phases L1, L2 and L3 consecutively for 60 seconds with the rated short-duration

power-frequency voltage.

Completing the power-frequency voltage test

Switch the voltage transformer disconnector to CLOSED position.

Mount the surge arresters.

17.6 Primary injection test

If requested by the customer's specifications, a primary injection test can be performed

on the panels.

Performing the test To test the current transformers, switch the three-position switch of the panel to be

tested to EARTHED position, and the circuit-breaker to CLOSED position.

After that, the test current is applied through the bushings of the cable connection

against the earthing busbar by means of a suitable test unit. Power supply can take place

via one or three phases.

After applying the test current, the secondary measuring devices and tripping can be

tested.

17.7 Applying operational voltage (high voltage)

The operating personnel must have been instructed, the installation work checked, and

test operation must have been performed without faults.

Close all covers.

Open all circuit-breakers.

On all panels, switch the three-position switch to "OPEN" position. If there is a feeder

without connected cables, earth this feeder.

Make sure that all consumers connected to all outgoing feeders are disconnected.

r Now you can apply operational high voltage and put the switchgear into operation as

described hereafter:

DANGER!

Mortal danger due to live parts.

Observe the Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering.

Observe the specifications for prevention of accidents.

Observe the operating and working instructions of the switchgear owner.

Page 157: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 157

Installation

Verifying correct terminal-phase connections

Verify correct terminal-phase connections of the next incoming feeder and connect the

incoming feeder:

Switch on tested incoming feeder.

The three-position switch of the feeder to be tested must be in "OPEN" position. The

opposite substation must be de-earthed and live.

Verify correct terminal-phase connections at the interfaces (capacitive test sockets on

right side of control board) of the panel to be tested and an energized panel using a

phase comparison test unit.

Plug the measuring cables of the phase comparison test unit into the test sockets of

the capacitive voltage detecting system "L1" of the two panels.

Read the indication.

Same procedure with the test sockets of the capacitive voltage detecting system of

the two other phases ("L2" and "L3").

r If the test unit shows "coincidence" in any case, the phase sequence of the tested

feeder is correct.

Applying voltage to thebusbar

Switch on incoming feeders in respective opposite substation.

Connect one incoming feeder to the busbar.

r Now the busbar of the switchgear is live.

Connecting consumerfeeders

One after the other, switch on all outgoing feeders with connected consumers.

r Now all feeders are connected. The switchgear is completely in operation.

DANGER!

Short-circuit in case of different phase sequence of the incoming feeders.

Make sure that all incoming feeders have the same phase sequence.

To check the phase sequence, use only phase comparison test units which are

adequate for HR or LRM test sokkets.

Page 158: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

158 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Operation

18 Control elements

DANGER!

The internal arc classification of the switchgear according to IEC 62271-200 has only

been proved by tests for the switchgear sides with internal arc classification and with

closed high-voltage compartments.

Determine the IAC internal arc classification of the switchgear by means of the data

on the rating plate (see Page 63, "Rating plates").

Regulations for access to switchgear areas without internal arc classification

according to IEC 62271-200 must be defined by the switchgear owner.

Fig. 109: Control board of the 600 mm circuit-breaker panel

a Position indicator for three-position switch (DISCONNECTING function)

s Position indicator for three-position switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

d Interrogation lever

f OFF pushbutton for circuit-breaker

g Test sockets for voltage detecting system, feeder

h "Feeder earthed“ locking device

j Operations counter for circuit-breaker

k Indicator for circuit-breaker "spring charged"

l Position indicator for circuit-breaker

; Test sockets for voltage detecting system, busbar (option)

A ON pushbutton for circuit-breaker

S Manual charging for circuit-breaker

D Actuating opening for earthing switch (EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH function)

F Actuating opening for disconnector (DISCONNECTING function)

G Control gate for opening the actuating openings (can only be operated if the interrogation lever d is pushed downwards)

H Ready-for-service indicator

Page 159: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 159

Operation

19 Checking the ready-for-service indicator

Perfect operation of the switchgear is only guaranteed if the ready-for-service indicator is

in the green area.

Circuit-breaker panels, bussectionalizers

If the ready-for-service indicator is in the red area:

Contact the regional Siemens representative immediately.

Shut down the circuit-breaker panel if required.

Fig. 110: Control board of the 900 mm circuit-breaker panel

Fig. 111: Ready-for-service indicator

a Green

s Red

d Pointer

Page 160: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

160 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Switch-disconnector, ring-main, vacuum contactor,

metering panels

Disconnector panels

20 Circuit-breaker operation

20.1 Closing the circuit-breaker manually

If there is no block active from the mechanical interlock, you can close the circuit-breaker

electrically or mechanically.

Closing the circuit-breakermanually

Operate the ON pushbutton in the mechanical or electrical control board.

r The circuit-breaker is closed.

20.2 Opening the circuit-breaker manually

You can open the circuit-breaker electrically or mechanically.

If the control voltage fails, you have to open the circuit-breaker manually.

If the feeder is earthed through the three-position disconnector and the circuit-breaker,

and if the "feeder locking device" is fitted, all electrical OFF signals are ineffective.

If the locking device is padlocked, the circuit-breaker cannot be opened mechanically

either.

Opening the circuit-breakermanually

Operate the OFF pushbutton in the mechanical or electrical control board.

r The circuit-breaker is open.

ATTENTION!

If the three-position switch-disconnector is operated although the switchgear is not

ready for service, this can cause an arc fault that will damage the switchgear. If the

ready-for-service indicator is in the red area:

Do not switch.

Contact the regional Siemens representative immediately.

ATTENTION!

If the three-position disconnector is operated although the switchgear is not ready for

service, this can cause an arc fault that will damage the switchgear. If the ready-for-

service indicator is in the red area:

Do not switch.

Contact the regional Siemens representative immediately.

Page 161: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 161

Operation

20.3 Test operation without auxiliary voltage

Perform the following actions to guarantee that the circuit-breaker is ready for operation:

Charge the closing spring (see Page 162, "Charging the closing spring manually").

Operate the ON pushbutton in the mechanical control board.

r The circuit-breaker is closed.

Operate the OFF pushbutton in the mechanical control board.

r The circuit-breaker is open.

On circuit-breakers with undervoltage release 3AX1103:

Shift the retaining screw of the striker from position A to B to activate the

undervoltage release.

ATTENTION!

If the retaining screw of the striker is not shifted back from position A to position B after

the test operation without auxiliary voltage, the undervoltage release will not function.

After the test operation without auxiliary voltage, shift the retaining screw of the

striker back from position A to position B.

Page 162: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

162 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

20.4 Test operation with auxiliary voltage (motor operating mechanism)

Switch on the supply voltage.

r The motor operating mechanism starts up and charges the closing spring.

Check whether the "closing spring charged" indication appears.

Close the circuit-breaker.

r The closing spring is recharged automatically.

Check whether the position indication "circuit-breaker CLOSED" appears.

Open the circuit-breaker.

Check whether the position indication "circuit-breaker OPEN" appears.

20.5 Charging the closing spring manually

The closing spring is charged automatically after applying control voltage. The energy

required for the switching sequence OPEN-CLOSED-OPEN (auto-reclosing) is stored in

the closing spring about 15 seconds after closing the circuit-breaker.

The hand crank is required to charge the closing spring manually if the control voltage

fails. The hand crank has a freewheel, so that there is no risk of injury if the control

voltage returns and the motor starts up with the crank inserted.

Remove cover from cutout.

Insert hand crank.

Turn hand crank clockwise approx. 30 turns.

r The indication "closing spring charged" appears in the inspection window.

Remove hand crank.

Close cutout with cover.

DANGER!

Risk of injury by sudden rotation of hand crank. If you use a hand crank without a

freewheel to charge the spring, the hand crank will rotate when the control voltage is

switched on again (motor starts up) and can lead to injury.

Use special hand crank with freewheel from the accessories.

Page 163: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 163

Operation

21 Three-position switch operation

This section describes the switching operations:

• DISCONNECTING and READY-TO-EARTH with the three-position disconnector

• DISCONNECTING and EARTHING with the three-position switch-disconnector

The manual switching operations DISCONNECTING or EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH

must be pre-selected. Pre-selection is only possible if the associated switching operation

is permissible.

The operating levers for the three-position switch are coded and identified by color:

• Operating levers for DISCONNECTING operation: Black ball handles.

• Operating levers for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation: Red ball handles.

• The actuating heads of the operating levers for switchgear with panel widths of 600

and 900 mm are identified with the following symbols:

Switching operation Panel width

Type of operating mechanism Spring-operated mechansim /

spring-operated/stored-energy

mechanism

Slow motion mechanism

600 mm 900 mm

EARTHING/ READY-TO-EARTH Turn operating lever 90° clockwise. Turn operating lever 180° clockwise.

DISCONNECTING Turn operating lever 90° counter-clockwise.

Turn operating lever 180° counter-clockwise.

NOTE!

Switching noise of the three-position switch:

In spring-operated mechanisms / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanisms, a

loud noise indicates switching by 90°.

In slow motion mechanisms, switching by 180° takes place almost without any

noise.

Page 164: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

164 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

21.1 Closing the three-position switch

Push the interrogation lever downwards.

Push the control gate to the left.

r The opening for the DISCONNECTING operation is free.

Insert the operating lever for the DISCONNECTING operation (black ball handles)

and,

- with spring-operated mechanism / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism

(600 mm panel), turn 90° clockwise;

- with slow motion mechanism (900 mm panel), turn 180° clockwise.

r The three-position switch is closed.

Remove the operating lever for the DISCONNECTING operation.

r The interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position.

ATTENTION!

Before operating the three-position disconnector:

Make sure that the circuit-breaker is in OPEN position.

DANGER!

For ring-main panels, switch-disconnector panels, metering panels and vacuum

contactor panels: If the switch-disconnector or the earthing switch are operated

although the switchgear is not ready for service (see Page 159, "Checking the ready-for-

service indicator"), this can cause an arc fault that will damage the switchgear and

endanger the life of the people present.

If the ready-for-service indicator is in the red area, do not switch.

Page 165: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 165

Operation

21.2 Opening the three-position switch

Push the interrogation lever downwards.

Push the control gate to the left.

r The opening for the DISCONNECTING operation is free.

Insert the operating lever for the DISCONNECTING operation (black ball handles) and

- with spring-operated mechanism / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism

(600 mm panel), turn 90° counter-clockwise;

- with slow motion mechanism (900 mm panel), turn 180° counter-clockwise.

r The three-position switch is open.

Remove the operating lever for the DISCONNECTING operation.

r The interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position.

ATTENTION!

Before operating the three-position disconnector:

Make sure that the circuit-breaker is in OPEN position.

DANGER!

For ring-main panels, switch-disconnector panels, metering panels and vacuum

contactor panels: If the switch-disconnector or the earthing switch are operated

although the switchgear is not ready for service (see Page 159, "Checking the ready-for-

service indicator"), this can cause an arc fault that will damage the switchgear and

endanger the life of the people present.

If the ready-for-service indicator is in the red area, do not switch.

Page 166: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

166 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

21.3 Earthing/ready-to-earth with the three-position switch

Push the interrogation lever downwards.

Push the control gate to the right.

r The opening for the EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation is free.

Insert the operating lever for the EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation (red ball

handles) and,

- with spring-operated mechanism / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism

(600 mm panel), turn 90° clockwise;

- with slow motion mechanism (900 mm panel), turn 180° clockwise.

r The three-position switch is closed.

Remove the operating lever for the EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation.

r The interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position.

In circuit-breaker panels, close and lock the circuit-breaker.

ATTENTION!

Before operating the three-position disconnector:

Make sure that the circuit-breaker is in OPEN position.

Make sure that the feeder is isolated from supply.

DANGER!

For ring-main panels, switch-disconnector panels, metering panels and vacuum

contactor panels: If the switch-disconnector or the earthing switch are operated

although the switchgear is not ready for service (see Page 159, "Checking the ready-for-

service indicator"), this can cause an arc fault that will damage the switchgear and

endanger the life of the people present.

If the ready-for-service indicator is in the red area, do not switch.

DANGER!

Danger! High voltage! The earthing process in circuit-breaker panels is not completed

until the circuit-breaker is closed.

Close the circuit-breaker after having switched the three-position disconnector to

the READY-TO-EARTH function.

Page 167: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 167

Operation

21.4 De-earthing with the three-position switch

In circuit-breaker panels: Unlock the locking device and open the circuit-breaker.

Push the interrogation lever downwards.

Push the control gate to the right.

r The opening for the EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation is free.

Insert the operating lever for the EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation (red ball

handles) and,

- with spring-operated mechanism / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism

(600 mm panel), turn 90° counter-clockwise.

- with slow motion mechanism (900 mm panel), turn 180° counter-clockwise.

r The three-position switch is open.

Remove the operating lever for the EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation.

r The interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position.

21.5 Operating the three-position switch with motor-operating mechanism

The switching operations DISCONNECTING, EARTHING und READY-TO-EARTH of the

three-position disconnector/switch-disconnector can be performed with a motor

operating mechanism (option).

Three-position switches with motor operating mechanisms can also be controlled from

remote according to their design.

ATTENTION!

Before operating the three-position disconnector:

Make sure that the circuit-breaker is in OPEN position.

DANGER!

For ring-main panels, switch-disconnector panels, metering panels and vacuum

contactor panels: If the switch-disconnector or the earthing switch are operated

although the switchgear is not ready for service (see Page 159, "Checking the ready-for-

service indicator"), this can cause an arc fault that will damage the switchgear and

endanger the life of the people present.

If the ready-for-service indicator is in the red area, do not switch.

Page 168: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

168 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

21.6 Three-position switch-disconnector with spring-operated/stored-energy mechanism

Special feature If the opening spring of the three-position switch-disconnector was tripped by a shunt

release or a fuse-link:

• The position indicator of the three-position switch-disconnector shows a black-red bar

and

• the operating shaft for the DISCONNECTING operation is still in CLOSED position. The

motor operating mechanism is out of operation.

Remedy Insert operating lever for DISCONNECTING operation (black ball handles) and switch

to OPEN position.

r The opening spring is recharged.

Replace the fuse-links if required (see Page 175, "Replacing HV HRC fuse-links")

otherwise the operating mechanism will immediately trip again, as the tripping

command is still active.

Then switch the three-position switch-disconnector to CLOSED position again.

r The opening spring is recharged.

21.7 Emergency operation of the three-position switch with slow motion mechanism (900 mm panel width)

If the motor voltage fails in three-position switches with motor operating mechanism and

the three-position switch is in none of the two end positions, the three-position switch

must be operated manually.

Position indicator forDISCONNECTING function

in faulty position

Fig. 112: Position indicator for DISCONNECTING function in faulty position

Page 169: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 169

Operation

Position indicator forEARTHING function in faulty

position

Fig. 113: Position indicator for EARTHING function in faulty position

To do this, the adapter for emergency operation has to be pushed on the standard

operating lever.

Adapter for emergencyoperation

Push emergency operation adapter on operating lever for three-position switch.

Fig. 114: Marking (long slot) on operating lever with pushed-on adapter

Fig. 115: Marking (short slot) on operating lever with pushed-on adapter

The noses of the operating lever are not significant for evaluating the position of the

operating mechanism.

ATTENTION!

If the operating lever with pushed-on adapter is incorrectly used, the indicator or even

the operating mechanism of the three-position switch can be damaged.

The operating lever with pushed-on adapter is not aligned according to the noses

of the standard operating lever, but according to the adapter slots.

Page 170: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

170 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

End positions of the three-position switch while switching with the operating lever with pushed-on adapter

Insert the operating lever with pushed-on adapter in such a way that the inner slot of the

adapter fits on the pin of the operating shaft.

Fig. 116: Inserting the operating lever with pushed-on adapter

End positions of DISCONNECTOR

ATTENTION!

The operating lever does not have a stop. Switching beyond the end position of the

three-position switch with the operating lever with pushed-on adapter will damage the

three-position switch.

Do always observe the markings on the adapter of the operating lever.

Adapter position Position of long slot: left

Position of short slot: right

Adapter position Position of long slot: right

Position of short slot: left

The disconnector is in CLOSED position. The disconnector is in OPEN position.

Page 171: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 171

Operation

End positions of EARTHING SWITCH

Emergency operation of theDISCONNECTING function

If the switch does not reach its end position, e.g., due to a failure of the auxiliary voltage

during disconnector operation, push the operating lever with pushed-on adapter onto the

hexagonal shaft for the DISCONNECTING function in such a way that the pin of the

hexagonal shaft fits in the inner slot of the operating adapter.

Fig. 117: Inserting the operating lever with pushed-on adapter (DISCONNECTING function)

Adapter position Position of long slot: bottom

Position of short slot: top

Adapter position Position of long slot: top

Position of short slot: bottom

The earthing switch is in CLOSED position. The earthing switch is in OPEN position.

Page 172: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

172 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Emergency operation of theEARTHING function

If the switch does not reach its end position, e.g., due to a failure of the auxiliary voltage

during earthing switch operation, push the operating lever with pushed-on adapter onto

the hexagonal shaft for the EARTHING function in such a way that the pin of the

hexagonal shaft fits in the inner slot of the operating adapter.

Fig. 118: Inserting the operating lever with pushed-on adapter (EARTHING function)

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Open the disconnector (insert the operating lever with pushed-on adapter and turn counter-clockwise until the slots at the adapter are horizontal to the actuating opening)

Remove the operating lever with pushed-on adapter. The interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position

End position

Remove the adapter from the operating lever and lay it back into the service bag

Page 173: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 173

Operation

Switching operations afteremergency operation

Perform further manual switching operations only with the associated operating levers

for the DISCONNECTING or EARTHING functions.

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Open the earthing switch (insert the operating lever with pushed-on adapter and turn counter-clockwise until the slots at the adapter are vertical to the actuating opening)

Remove the emergency operating lever. The interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position

End position

Remove the adapter from the operating lever and lay it back into the service bag

Page 174: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

174 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

22 Verification of safe isolation from supply

The panels are equipped with voltage detecting systems.

Use voltage indicators according to DIN VDE 0682-415 only.

The function of the voltage indicator must have been checked:

• with a test unit according to DIN VDE 0682-415

• on live equipment

The function of the coupling section must have been checked:

• DIN VDE 0682-415

Remove covers from interface (capacitive test sockets L1, L2, L3).

Plug voltage indicator in all three phases L1, L2, L3 of the interface.

r If the indicator does not flash or light up in any of the three phases, the phases are

not live.

Replace the covers on the interface.

a Voltage indicator type LRM

s Interface (capacitive test socket) for L2

d Earth socket

f Cover for test sockets

g Documentation to repeat test of interface condition

Page 175: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 175

Operation

23 Replacing HV HRC fuse-links

If a fuse-link or the shunt release of the three-position switch-disconnector trips, the

position indicator of the three-position switch-disconnector shows a black-red bar (see

Page 168, "Three-position switch-disconnector with spring-operated/stored-energy

mechanism"). An overview of the applicable HV HRC fuses is given in (see Page 52,

"Selection of HV HRC fuse-links").

DANGER!

Hot fuse-links can cause burns during replacement.

Let hot fuses cool down before replacing.

Wear gloves.

ATTENTION!

If fuse-links are inserted the other way round, the striker cannot trip the three-position

switch-disconnector.

Fit new fuse-links with the contact side of the striker into the contact of the handle.

ATTENTION!

If a panel with fuses is equipped with an inadequate cable compartment cover, correct

seating of the fuse slide in the fuse box cannot be guaranteed.

In panels with fuses, use the appropriate cable compartment cover only.

Page 176: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

176 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

The cover can only be unlocked if the three-position switch-disconnector is in EARTHED

position. When the cable compartment cover is removed, mechanical operation of the

three-position switch-disconnector is blocked. Manual de-earthing is not possible. In

case of motor operating mechanisms, the electrical power supply is interrupted by an

auxiliary switch located at the cable compartment cover.

Work operations Isolate and earth the cable feeder.

Undo the fixing bolts of the cable compartment cover.

Fig. 119: Cable compartment cover of a panel with fuses (view from the front)

Fig. 120: Cable compartment cover of a panel with fuses (view from the rear)

Fig. 121: Cable compartment cover of a panel with fuses (view from above)

Page 177: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 177

Operation

Push the interlocking lever a of the cable compartment cover s upwards, lift the

cable compartment cover and unhinge it.

Withdraw the HV HRC fuse slide with the fuse-link.

Replacing HV HRC fuse-links

Pull the fixing bracket upwards and pull the fuse out.

Page 178: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

178 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fit new HV HRC fuse into the contact springs so that the arrow on the HV HRC fuse

points at the box cover.

Pull the fixing bracket upwards and press the fuse into the mounting clips.

Insert the HV HRC fuse slide with the fuse-link in the guide slot and push it into the

fuse box as far as it will go.

Push the interlocking lever of the cable compartment cover upwards and refit the

cable cable compartment cover.

Push the interlock of the cable compartment cover downwards.

Fix the cable compartment cover with two self-tapping screws.

De-earth the feeder.

Page 179: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 179

Operation

24 Operating the voltage transformer disconnector

24.1 Opening the voltage transformer disconnector

Earth the feeder.

Undo the fixing bolts of the cable compartment cover.

Remove the cable compartment cover.

Remove the padlock from the voltage transformer disconnector.

Insert the 5 mm double-bit key and turn 180° counter-clockwise.

DANGER!

If the voltage transformer disconnector is closed or opened when the panel is live, this

can produce an arc fault that can cause personal injuries or destroy the switchgear.

Operate the voltage transformer disconnector only when the panel is earthed.

Page 180: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

180 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Refit the padlock.

r The voltage transformer disconnector is isolated from high-voltage, earthed and

secured against reclosing.

24.2 Closing the voltage transformer disconnector

Remove the padlock from the voltage transformer disconnector.

Insert the 5 mm double-bit key and turn 180° clockwise.

Refit and lock the padlock.

r The voltage transformer disconnector is connected to high voltage and secured

against unauthorized opening.

Hang the cable compartment cover in.

Fix the cable compartment cover with two self-tapping screws.

DANGER!

If the voltage transformer disconnector is closed or opened when the panel is live, this

can produce an arc fault that can cause personal injuries or destroy the switchgear.

Operate the voltage transformer disconnector only when the panel is earthed.

Page 181: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 181

Operation

25 Short instructions

The operating levers for the three-position switch are coded and identified by color:

• Operating levers for DISCONNECTING operation: Black ball handles.

• Operating levers for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation: Red ball handles.

DANGER!

Danger in case of maloperation! The following short instructions give an overview of

the operating procedures.

Perform the switching operations as described (see Page 160, "Circuit-breaker

operation" and see Page 163, "Three-position switch operation") and observe the

warnings given there.

Fig. 122: Operating lever for DISCONNECTING operation - only switchgear with panel widths of 600 mm

Fig. 123: Operating lever for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation - only switchgear with panel widths of 600 mm

Page 182: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

182 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Fig. 124: Operating lever for DISCONNECTING operation - switchgear with panel widths of 600 and 900 mm

Fig. 125: Operating lever for EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH operation - switchgear with panel widths of 600 and 900 mm

Page 183: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 183

Operation

• The actuating heads of the operating levers for switchgear with panel widths of 600

and 900 mm are identified with the following symbols:

The switching operations are identical for 600 mm or 900 mm panels. Only the operating

lever is turned by 90° with a panel width of 600 mm, and by 180° with a panel width of

900 mm.

The switching operations for both panel widths are shown in the example "Closing the

disconnector". All the other illustrations are referred to a panel width of 600 mm.

Switching operation Panel width

Type of operating mecha-

nism

Spring-operated / spring-opera-

ted/stored-energy mechanism

Slow motion mechanism

600 mm 900 mm

EARTHING/READY-TO-EARTH

Turn operating lever 90° clockwise. Turn operating lever 180° clockwise.

DISCONNECTING Turn operating lever 90° counter-clockwise.

Turn operating lever 180° counter-clockwise.

NOTE!

Switching noise of the three-position switch:

In spring-operated mechanisms / spring-operated/stored-energy mechanisms, a

loud noise indicates switching by 90°.

In slow motion mechanisms, switching by 180° takes place almost without any

noise.

Page 184: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

184 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

25.1 Operating circuit-breaker panels

Circuit-breaker panel: Connecting the feeder to the busbar

600 mm panel width

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the left

Close the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

900 mm panel width

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the left

Page 185: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 185

Operation

Circuit-breaker panel: Disconnecting the feeder from the busbar

Close the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

600 mm panel width

Initial situation Open the circuit-breaker Push the interrogation lever downwards

Push the control gate to the left Open the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 186: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

186 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

900 mm panel width

Initial situation Open the circuit-breaker Push the interrogation lever downwards

Push the control gate to the left Open the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 187: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 187

Operation

Circuit-breaker panel: Feeder earthing

600 mm panel width

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the feeder

Push the locking device upwards Fit a padlock

Page 188: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

188 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

900 mm panel width

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right

Switch three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the feeder

Push the locking device upwards Fit a padlock

Page 189: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 189

Operation

Circuit-breaker panel: De-earthing the feeder

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the feeder

Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right Switch the three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 190: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

190 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the feeder

Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right Switch three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 191: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 191

Operation

Circuit-breaker panel: Feeder earthing with forced sequence circuit

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the control gate to the right Switch the three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

The circuit-breaker closes automatically (time relay adjustable; factory setting: 1 s), the feeder is earthed.

Remove the operating lever (the control gate returns to its initial position)

Push the locking device upwards

Fit a padlock

Page 192: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

192 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Push the control gate to the right Switch three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

The circuit-breaker closes automatically (time relay adjustable; factory setting: 1 s), the feeder is earthed.

Remove the operating lever (the control gate returns to its initial position)

Push the locking device upwards

Fit a padlock

Page 193: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 193

Operation

Circuit-breaker panel: Feeder de-earthing with forced sequence circuit

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise, the

circuit-breaker opens automatically before the

three-position disconnector opens)

Remove the operating lever (the control gate returns to its initial position)

Page 194: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

194 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Push the control gate to the right

Switch three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise), the circuit-

breaker opens automatically before the three-

position disconnector opens)

Remove the operating lever (the control gate returns to its initial position)

Page 195: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 195

Operation

25.2 Operating vacuum contactor panels

Vacuum contactor panel: Connecting the feeder to the busbar

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Close the three-position switch-disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the contactor via the bay controller ( e.g. SIPROTEC)

Page 196: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

196 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Vacuum contactor panel: Disconnecting the feeder from the busbar

Initial situation Open the contactor via the bay controller (e.g. SIPROTEC)

Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Open the three-position switch-disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 197: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 197

Operation

Vacuum contactor panel: Feeder earthing

Vacuum contactor panel: Feeder de-earthing

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector to EARTHED position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector from EARTHED to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 198: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

198 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

25.3 Operating switch-disconnector, disconnector, ring-main and metering panels

Switch-disconnector, disconnector, ring-main or metering panel: Connecting the feeder to thebusbar

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Close the three-position switch-disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 900 mm (only disconnector panel as of 2000 A)

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Close the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 199: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 199

Operation

Switch-disconnector, disconnector, ring-main or metering panels: Disconnecting the feeder fromthe busbar

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Open the three-position switch-disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 900 mm (only disconnector panel as of 2000 A)

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the left

Open the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 200: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

200 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Switch-disconnector, disconnector, ring-main or metering panels: Feeder earthing

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector to EARTHED position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 900 mm (only disconnector panel as of 2000 A)

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector to EARTHED position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 201: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 201

Operation

Switch-disconnector, disconnector, ring-main or metering panels: Feeder de-earthing

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector from EARTHED to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 900 mm (only disconnector panel as of 2000 A)

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position switch-disconnector from EARTHED to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 202: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

202 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

25.4 Operating bus sectionalizer panels

Bus sectionalizer panel with one three-position disconnector: Coupling the busbars

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the left

Close the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the left

Page 203: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 203

Operation

Bus sectionalizer panel with one three-position disconnector: Decoupling the busbars

Close the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

Panel width 900 mm

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Open the circuit-breaker Push the interrogation lever downwards

Push the control gate to the left Open the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 204: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

204 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Open the circuit-breaker Push the interrogation lever downwards

Push the control gate to the left Open the three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 205: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 205

Operation

Bus sectionalizer panel with one three-position disconnector: Earthing the right-hand busbarsystem

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right

Switch the three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the busbar system

Push the locking device upwards Fit a padlock

Page 206: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

206 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right

Switch three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the busbar system

Push the locking device upwards Fit a padlock

Page 207: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 207

Operation

Bus sectionalizer panel with one three-position disconnector: De-earthing the right-hand busbarsystem

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system

Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right Switch the three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 208: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

208 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system

Push the interrogation lever downwards Push the control gate to the right Switch three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 209: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 209

Operation

25.5 Operating bus sectionalizers with two three-position disconnectors

Bus sectionalizer panel with two three-position disconnectors: Coupling the busbars

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Close the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Close the right-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Page 210: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

210 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

Panel width 600 mm

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Close the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 211: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 211

Operation

Bus sectionalizer panel with two three-position disconnectors: Decoupling the busbars

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Close the right-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

Panel width 900 mm

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Open the circuit-breaker

Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Open the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Page 212: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

212 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Open the right-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 600 mm

Page 213: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 213

Operation

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Open the circuit-breaker

Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Open the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Open the right-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 214: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

214 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Bus sectionalizer panel with two three-position disconnectors: Earthing the left-hand busbarsystem

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards

Push the left-hand control gate to the left Close the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the right

Page 215: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 215

Operation

Switch the right-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the left-hand busbar system Fit a padlock

Panel width 600 mm

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards

Page 216: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

216 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Push the left-hand control gate to the left Close the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the right

Switch the right-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the left-hand busbar system Fit a padlock

Panel width 900 mm

Page 217: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 217

Operation

Bus sectionalizer panel with two three-position disconnectors: De-earthing the left-hand busbarsystem

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the right-hand control gate to the right

Switch the right-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 218: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

218 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Open the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 600 mm

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Page 219: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 219

Operation

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system Push the interrogation lever down and push the right-hand control gate to the right

Switch the right-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Open the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 900 mm

Page 220: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

220 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Bus sectionalizer panel with two three-position disconnectors: Earthing the right-hand busbarsystem

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Close the right-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the right-hand busbar system

Fit a padlock

Page 221: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 221

Operation

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Close the right-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the right-hand busbar system

Page 222: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

222 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Bus sectionalizer panel with two three-position disconnectors: De-earthing the right-hand busbarsystem

Fit a padlock

Panel width 900 mm

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system

Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Open the right-hand three-position disconnector Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 223: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 223

Operation

Panel width 900 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock (the locking device goes down automatically)

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 180° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the right-hand control gate to the left

Open the right-hand three-position disconnector

Page 224: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

224 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

25.6 Operating circuit-breaker panel with busbar earthing switch

Earthing the busbar system

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 900 mm

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Page 225: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 225

Operation

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the feeder Push the right-hand control gate to the right

Switch the right-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the control gate returns to its initial position)

Open the circuit-breaker. The feeder is earthed through the right-hand three-position disconnector.

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Panel width 600 mm

Page 226: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

226 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Close the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker to earth the busbar system

Panel width 600 mm

Page 227: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 227

Operation

De-earthing the busbar system

Fit a padlock

Panel width 600 mm

Panel width 600 mm

Initial situation Remove the padlock

Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the busbar system Push the interrogation lever downwards and push the left-hand control gate to the left

Page 228: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

228 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Open the left-hand three-position disconnector (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector to READY-TO-EARTH position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° clockwise)

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Close the circuit-breaker

Panel width 600 mm

Page 229: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 229

Operation

Push the right-hand control gate to the right Switch the right-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise). The feeder remains earthed through the left-hand three-position disconnector.

Remove the operating lever (the control gate returns to its initial position) Open the circuit-breaker to de-earth the feeder

Push the interrogation lever down again and push the left-hand control gate to the right

Switch the left-hand three-position disconnector from READY-TO-EARTH to OPEN position (insert the operating lever and turn 90° counter-clockwise)

Panel width 600 mm

Page 230: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

230 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Remove the operating lever (the interrogation lever and the control gate return to their initial position)

Panel width 600 mm

Page 231: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 231

Operation

26 Cable testing

Preconditions Before testing the cables, the switch positions must be as follows:

• Circuit-breaker in OPEN position,

• three-position switch in OPEN position and

• voltage transformer disconnector (option) in EARTHED position.

The following table contains the maximum values for the DC test voltage:

Feeder earthing (see Page 166, "Earthing/ready-to-earth with the three-position

switch").

Secure against reclosing.

Verify safe isolation from supply (see Page 174, "Verification of safe isolation from

supply").

Undo the fixing bolts of the cable compartment cover.

Remove the cable compartment cover.

Open the voltage transformer disconnector (see Page 179, "Opening the voltage

transformer disconnector").

Rated voltage of the switchgear

[ kV]

DC test voltage, maximum value

[kV]

AC test voltage 0.1 Hz, maxi-

mum value [kV]

12 48 19

24 56 * 38

* Maximum value of test voltage for panels without HV HRC fuses: 70 kV

DANGER!

If the voltage transformer disconnector is closed, the test voltage can destroy the

voltage transformer and cause personal injuries.

Switch the voltage transformer disconnector to EARTHED position before testing

the cables and secure it (see Page 179, "Opening the voltage transformer

disconnector").

DANGER!

If DC voltage is applied to the cable and there are incoming overvoltages on the busbar,

there is risk of flashovers.

Keep safety distances.

Install barriers.

Switch on warnings.

ATTENTION!

The voltage indicators CAPDIS-S1+ and CAPDIS-S2+, LRM, VOIS+ and VOIS R+ may

be damaged at test voltages > 15 kV and frequencies < 16 2/3 Hz.

Short-circuit voltage indicators with the earthing points of the test sockets.

Page 232: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Operation

232 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Remove the stopper of the connected cable T-plug according to the manufacturer's

instructions.

Insert / screw the test adapter in the cable T-plug.

Connect test lead.

Short-circuit and earth the capacitive test sockets at the LRM or CAPDIS system.

De-earth the feeder (see Page 167, "De-earthing with the three-position switch").

Perform voltage test.

Proceed in reverse order to return to the initial situation.

Supplier of cable T-plug Test adapter for cable T-plug

Euromold 400TR 400TB/G; 430TB-630A; 300PB-630A; 440TB/G

K400TB/G; K430TB-630A; K300PB-630A; K440TB/G

nkt cables PAK 630 M12 CB12-630; CC12-630

CB24-630; CC24-630

PAK 630 M16 CB36-630(1250); CC36-630(1250)

Südkabel PR 23.1 SET 12; SEHDT 13; SEHDK 13.1

SET 24; SEHDT 23; SEHDK 23.1

Tyco Electronics RSTI-56TR RSTI-L58xx, RSTI-CC-L56xx

RSTI-58xx; RSTI-CC-58xx

RSTI-36-Lxx

RSTI-56Lxx

3M PR 23.2 93-EE 705-6

93-EE 715-6

Page 233: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 233

Operation

27 Maintenance

27.1 Maintenance

Under normal operating conditions, the fixed-mounted circuit-breaker switchgear

NXPLUS C, the vacuum-cuircuit breaker 3AH55 and the vacuum contactor 3TL7 are

maintenance-free. The switchgear vessel is designed as a "sealed pressure system"

according to IEC 62 271-200 , i.e. maintenance of the insulation filling is not required.

Replacement ofcomponents

Due to the fact that all parts of this switchgear type have been optimized to last the

normal service life, it is not possible to recommend particular spare parts.

Special operatingconditions

If the switchgear is used in abnormally unfavorable indoor conditions beyond the normal

operating conditions (e.g. frequent heavy condensation, dust-ridden air, etc.) we

recommend to clean the external parts of the vacuum circuit-breaker and, if necessary,

to renew the anti-corrosion protection greasing at regular intervals. To do this, you may

only use the materials specified hereafter on the individual functional parts of the circuit-

breaker.

Permissible cleaning agents/lubricants:

• For bearings, sliding surfaces: Isoflex Topas L 32, Klüber - Lubrication KG,

Geisenhauer Str. 7, Postfach 70 10 47, D-81310 München

• For bearings that are inaccessible for grease, and bearings of the auxiliary

switch S1: Tellus Oil 32, Shell Direct GmbH, Suhrenkamp 71, D-22335 Hamburg

Clean the external parts of the circuit-breaker at regular intervals.

Renew the anti-corrosion protection greasing.

Operate the circuit-breaker several times mechanically by hand for test.

27.2 Switchgear extension and replacement of panels and components

The individual components, such as measuring instruments, current transformers, etc.

can be replaced. For switchgear extension and replacement of components, please

contact the regional Siemens representative. Due to the busbar concept, switchgear

extension or panel replacement is possible without gas work.

Information required for spare part orders of single components and devices:

• Type and serial number of the switchgear and the circuit-breaker (see rating plates)

• Precise designation of the device or component, if applicable on the basis of the

information and illustrations in the associated instructions, a drawing, sketch or circuit

diagram

ATTENTION!

Parts of the switchgear that cannot be dismantled may be damaged if they come into

contact with cleaning agents.

Do not wash joints and bearings which cannot be dismantled with a cleaning agent.

Page 234: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

234 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

28 Index

A

Accessories ................................................................. 44

Accessories, checking ............................................... 150

Adapters, busbars...................................................... 102

Aligning panels............................................................. 99

Applying, high voltage ............................................... 156

Aseismic capacity .............................................. 9, 51, 75

Assembly, preconditions.............................................. 99

Auxiliary circuits, connection...................................... 132

Auxiliary means, installation......................................... 91

B

Bolting together, panels ............................................... 99

Busbar covers .............................................................119

Busbar support ...........................................................112

Busbar support, installation ........................................112

Busbar system............................................................. 27

Busbar, connecting .................................................... 157

Busbars, assembly .................................................... 102

Busbars, versions ...................................................... 102

C

C.t-operated releases (Y6, Y4) ..................................... 66

Cable basement........................................................... 73

Cable bracket, aligning ............................................... 126

Cable bracket, mounting............................................ 126

Cable compartment cover, procedure for removal....... 95

Cable connection ......................................................... 27

Cable connection, connecting T-plugs........................ 124

Cable connection, double cables ............................... 128

Cable connection, panels as of 2000 A ..................... 129

Cable connection, triple cables .................................. 128

Cable testing.............................................................. 231

Caps, busbar adapters ............................................... 102

Charging the closing spring manually ........................ 162

Checking, accessories ............................................... 150

Checking, transport damages...................................... 93

Circuit-breaker.............................................................. 15

Circuit-breaker operation............................................ 160

Circuit-breaker tripping signal ...................................... 66

Circuit-breaker, activating undervoltage release......... 153

Circuit-breaker, charging the closing spring

manually .......................................................... 162

Circuit-breaker, design ..................................................15

Circuit-breaker, manual closing...................................160

Circuit-breaker, manual opening .................................160

Circuit-breaker, test operation with auxiliary voltage ..162

Circuit-breaker, test operation without

auxiliary voltage................................................161

Circuit-breaker, vacuum interrupters.............................16

Comments, EMC......................................................... 91

Commissioning...........................................................147

Completeness of delivery............................................ 93

Connecting consumer feeders ..................................157

Constructional data, foundation....................................74

Constructional stipulations .......................................... 70

Control elements........................................................158

Core drillings................................................................ 78

Cross adapters, busbars.............................................102

Current transformer, installation ................................. 113

Current transformers on twin busbar ......................... 113

D

Description .................................................................... 8

Disposal....................................................................... 69

Due application.............................................................. 7

E

Earthing busbar, installation........................................ 117

Earthing system .......................................................... 73

Earthing, switchgear................................................... 118

Electrical connections.................................................124

Emergency release.....................................................152

End adapters, busbars................................................102

End of service life ........................................................ 69

End walls, installation .................................................122

Endurance classes....................................................... 68

Erecting the switchgear............................................... 93

Evenness, straightness ............................................... 86

Extension with individual panels ................................123

F

fastening the switchgear to the foundation................ 101

Final work ...................................................................147

Fixing material ............................................................. 91

Fixing on wooden pallets for delivery .......................... 95

Floor openings, fixing points ........................................74

Page 235: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

802-9081.9 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * Revision 02 235

Floor, construction....................................................... 72

Floor, load-bearing capacity ..........................................71

Forced sequence circuit .....................................191, 193

Foundation, fastening the switchgear to .................... 101

Function test ..............................................................152

Function test, electrical ..............................................154

Function test, mechanical...........................................152

H

High voltage, applying ................................................156

High-voltage test, current consumption per panel ...... 48

HV HRC fuse assembly ............................................... 25

HV HRC fuse-links, replacing......................................175

I

Information to Siemens before delivery ...................... 89

Installation ................................................................... 70

Installation material ..................................................... 91

Installation, auxiliary means......................................... 91

Installation, current transformer ................................ 113

Installation, earthing busbar ....................................... 117

Installation, end walls .................................................122

Installation, low-voltage compartments...................... 119

Installation, preparing .................................................. 89

Installation, tools ......................................................... 91

Installation, voltage transformer ................................. 114

Installing the transport units........................................ 96

Interlocks ..................................................................... 40

IP31D..........................................................................138

IP31D, IP32D, IP34D ..................................................138

IP32D..........................................................................144

IP34D..........................................................................146

J

Joining panels.............................................................100

L

locking devices ............................................................ 40

Low-voltage compartments, installation..................... 119

M

Maintenance.............................................................. 233

O

Operating mechanisms ............................................... 20

Operating times........................................................... 64

Operation....................................................................158

P

Packing and transport unit............................................93

Panel versions .............................................................. 11

Panels, aligning ............................................................99

Panels, bolting together ...............................................99

Panels, joining ............................................................ 100

Partition class...............................................................50

Personnel, instructing................................................. 152

Power losses................................................................48

Power-frequency voltage test on site ......................... 155

Primary injection test ................................................. 156

Protection table............................................................52

Q

Qualified personnel ........................................................7

R

Rating plates ................................................................63

Ready-for-service indicator ...........................................39

Ready-for-service indicator, checking.................... 97, 159

Recycling......................................................................69

Room planning .............................................................70

S

Safety instructions .........................................................5

Screened/unscreened busbars .................................. 102

Screw inserts, busbars .............................................. 102

Seaworthy crate, preparing storage .............................90

Secondary wiring, connection.................................... 132

Selection of HV HRC fuse-links....................................52

Short instructions....................................................... 181

Signal terms and definitions...........................................5

Splashing water from any direction............................ 146

Spring-operated mechanism ........................................20

Standards, electromagnetic compatibility, EMC ..........50

Stoppers, busbars ...................................................... 102

Storage room/space, preparing....................................90

Stored-energy mechanism ...........................................20

Surge arrester ..............................................................27

Surge arresters, connection ....................................... 131

Surge limiters, connection ......................................... 131

Switchgear extension and replacement

of components.................................................233

Switchgear room, preparing for installation..................70

Switchgear, assembly ..................................................99

Page 236: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

236 Revision 02 * INSTALLATION AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NXPLUSC * 802-9081.9

Switchgear, unloading and erecting ............................. 93

T

Technical data .............................................................. 47

Technical data, complete switchgear ........................... 47

Technical data, rating plates......................................... 63

Technical data, three-position switch-disconnector ..... 67

Technical data, three-positon disconnector.................. 67

Technical data, vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55 ............ 64

Terminal-phase connections, verifying....................... 157

Test operation ............................................................ 152

Test operation with auxiliary voltage.......................... 162

Test operation with motor operating mechanism ...... 162

Test operation without auxiliary voltage,

circuit-breaker .................................................. 161

Test operation, faults ................................................. 154

Test voltages, busbar voltage transformers ................. 48

Three-position disconnector ........................................ 18

Three-position switch, closing ................................... 164

Three-position switch, de-earthing............................. 167

Three-position switch, earthing.................................. 166

Three-position switch, emergency operation

with slow motion mechanism ........................ 168

Three-position switch, motor operating

mechanism...................................................... 167

Three-position switch, opening.................................. 165

Three-position switch, operation................................ 163

Three-position switch, ready-to-earth ........................ 166

Three-position switch-disconnector ............................. 19

Three-position switch-disconnector with spring-

operated/stored-energy mechanism................ 168

Three-position switch-disconnector, technical data ..... 67

Three-positon disconnector, technical data.................. 67

Tools, installation ......................................................... 91

Transformer protection table ....................................... 52

Transport damages...................................................... 93

Transport of switchgear on roller pads

(reinforced rollers) ............................................. 96

Transport of switchgear without wooden pallets ........ 96

Transport regulations ................................................... 89

Transport to place of installation.................................. 94

Transport unit and packing........................................... 93

U

Undervoltage release .................................................. 66

Unloading the switchgear............................................ 93

V

vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55 .................................... 64

Vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55, closing solenoid......... 66

Vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55, motor operating

mechanism........................................................ 65

Vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH55, shunt release............. 66

Vacuum contactor, technical data ................................ 69

Varistor module ........................................................... 66

Verification of safe isolation from supply ................... 174

Vertically falling water drops.......................................138

Vertically falling water drops, switchgear

inclined by 15° ..................................................144

Voltage transformer disconnector, closing..................180

Voltage transformer disconnector, opening ................179

Voltage transformer disconnector, operation..............179

Voltage transformer, installation ................................. 114

W

Wooden pallets, removing the switchgear from ......... 95

Work protection clothing ............................................... 6

Page 237: Medium-Voltage Switchgear - · PDF fileMedium-Voltage Switchgear Type NXPLUS C Fixed-Mounted Circuit-Breaker Switchgear up to 24 kV, Extendable Single Busbar, Metal-Enclosed, Gas-Insulated

Impressum

Siemens AG

Energy Sector

Division Power Distribution

Schaltanlagenwerk Frankfurt

Carl-Benz-Str. 22

D-60386 Frankfurt

© Siemens AG 2008